chemistry vitros vitros 350 manuals maintenance & troubleshooting
TRANSCRIPT
350/250/250AT Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide
Front PDF CoverPortrait8.50" wide x 11" tall(finished size)
Part No. 994132UC
Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide
Export authorized under general license GTDA (General Technical Data Available)
IMPORTANT
The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. prior to publication.
No patent license is granted by the information.
Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. reserves the right to change this information without notice, and makes no warranty, express or implied, with respect to the information. The company shall not be liable for any loss or damage, including consequential or special damages resulting from the use of this information, even if loss or damage is caused by its negligence or other fault.
VITROS is a trademark of Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.
Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc., 2004. All rights reserved.
Contents
1 Welcome
2 Periodic Maintenance2–1 Preparing for Periodic Maintenance2–3 Daily Maintenance2–3 Disposals and Supplies2–4 Emptying Disposal Boxes2–7 Cleaning Sample Trays2–8 Cleaning Height, Cup, and PCS Microcollection Tube
Adapters2–9 Loading Mixing Cup Arrays and Tips2–10 Verifying Slide Inventory2–11 Verifying QC Fluids are Run on Slide Lots2–12 Reference Fluid2–18 Diluents2–21 Configuring the Diluent Tray2–23 Immuno-Wash Fluid2–27 Weekly Maintenance2–28 Cleaning the Tray Platform and Transport Arm2–29 Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly2–34 Cleaning the Cup Retainer2–34 Cleaning the Touchscreen Monitor/Flat LCD Touchscreen
Monitor2–35 Cleaning the Keypad Cover2–35 Backup QC, Config, and Calibration Data2–36 Cleaning the Sample-Metering Path2–37 Inspecting the Air Filter2–38 As-Required Maintenance2–39 Replacing Humidity Control Packs and Desiccant Packs2–42 Changing the Reflectometer Lamp2–43 Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris2–49 Replacing the Sample
Metering Tubing2–51 Cleaning the Discard Chutes2–54 Cleaning the Cabinets2–55 Cleaning the Dispense Blade/Slide Path2–57 Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots2–62 Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps2–67 Cleaning the Proboscis2–72 Cleaning the PSID Scanner Window2–74 Decontaminating the Analyzer2–74 Cleaning the Analyzer
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System - Operator’s Manual Contents-i
Contents
3 Diagnostics3–1 Using the Diagnostics Function3–3 Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS)3–4 MEDS Sample Handler3–5 MEDS Sample Handler Movement Sequences3–7 MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 23–8 MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2 Movement Sequences3–9 MEDS Sample Metering3–10 MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Truck/
Proboscis3–12 MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/
Sample Fluid Drop3–14 MEDS Reference and Immuno-Rate (IR) Metering3–15 MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer3–16 MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer
Movement Sequences3–17 MEDS Reflectometer3–18 Subsystem Tests3–18 Lab Comp Protocol Analyzer3–18 Setup/Adjust3–19 Rate/CM Correction Factor Test3–29 Reflectometer Iris Adjustment3–32 Current Setup Values3–33 Stand-Alone Diagnostic Tests3–34 Loopback Tests3–38 Complex Tests3–38 Performance Tests3–39 Sample Metering3–40 Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis3–44 Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection3–49 Incubator3–49 Testing Incubator Pad Reflectance3–51 Testing Incubator Position Timing3–53 PSID Scanner3–53 Performing the Tool Side Test3–57 Performing the User Samples Test3–59 Reflectometer3–59 Testing the Shutter3–61 Performing the Reflectometer Static Test3–66 Running the Dynamic Test3–72 Reference Metering3–73 Testing the Reference Fluid Metering Assembly Timing3–74 Running the System Tests3–81 Immuno-Rate Metering3–82 Testing the Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly Timing3–84 Running the System Tests3–91 Electrometer3–92 Testing Electrometer Normal Cycle
Contents-ii VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System - Operator’s Manual Version 2.0
Contents
3–94 Testing Electrometer Contact Drive Timing3–96 Testing Electrometer Auto Checks3–100 Testing Electrometer Extended Auto Checks3–102 Cartridge Handling3–102 Plunger Count Test3–102 Testing the Bar Code Scanner3–105 Testing Rotor Movement3–108 Hardware and Chemistry Information3–110 Recent History Log3–113 Condition Code3–114 Datalogger Analysis3–115 Closing the Current Datalogger File3–117 Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files3–125 Software Identification
4 Environmental Monitoring4–1 Environmental Monitoring4–2 Environmental Error Conditions4–2 Incubator Temperature Control4–6 Slide Supply Temperature Control4–10 Slide Supply Humidity Control4–15 Voltage Readings
5 Troubleshooting5–1 Self-Diagnostic Features5–1 Error Conditions5–1 Severity Levels5–3 Error Log Screen5–7 Troubleshooting Help Screens5–11 Error Messages for Downloaded Samples5–11 Flags and Codes on Forms Printer Reports5–11 Hardware Troubleshooting5–11 Initializing the Analyzer5–12 Loading/Resetting (Rebooting) the Analyzer Program5–12 Clearing Sample Tray Jams5–15 Clearing Sample Metering Jams5–16 Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door5–20 Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door5–24 Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Slide Supply Access
Door5–27 Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dis-
pense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area5–36 Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/
RT Eject Blade Position5–41 Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System - Operator’s Manual Contents-iii
Contents
at the PM Slide-Eject Position5–45 Clearing Slide Jams in the
Tip-Locator/Metering Area5–49 General Troubleshooting Procedures5–49 Blank Control Unit Monitor5–49 CRT Monitor5–49 LCD Monitor5–49 Touch Screen is not Functioning Properly5–49 CRT Monitor5–49 LCD Monitor5–50 Touch Screen is Visible But Targets Do Not Respond5–50 CRT and LCD Monitors5–50 The Analyzer Cannot be Powered Up5–51 No Results are Printing5–55 Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the
Lab Computer
6 Replacing Parts6–1 Installing a New Slide Supply Rotor Sensor6–1 Removing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor6–4 Replacing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor6–7 Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade6–11 Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer
Contents-iv VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System - Operator’s Manual Version 2.0
VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Manual
Revision History
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Revision Date Description
2005-01-03 Incorporated updates for the VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System
• Reflects software release version 9.0
• Reflects new LCD Monitor
• Illustrations reflecting design updates to the Monitor are revised throughout
• Added new procedure to clean the LCD Monitor
• Updated General Troubleshooting Procedures
04/04 New release. Reflects software version v8.0
• Removed reference to Battery Backup System
10/01 Reflects revised information:
• Table of Contents
• Daily Maintenance Log (Chapter 2)
• Revised Filter Adjustment Guidelines - Target Voltage (Chapter 2)
• This manual should contain the following Technical Bulletins:
• J12379 - Type III Monitor for the VITROS 250/250AT, VITROS 550/750 and VITROS 950/950AT Chemistry Systems and VITROS ECi Immunodiagnostic Systems
• J12398 - Cleaning Procedure for the TIP Locator Assembly on the VITROS 250/250AT Chemistry System
1/00 Reflects software version 7.0.
New or revised information:
• Revised Filter Adjustment Guidelines (Chapter 3)
• Revised Filter Verification Limits (Chapter 3)
• Revised replacement blade orientation and illustration (Chapter 6)
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide v
Important Safeguards and Precautions
6/98 Reflects software version 6.0.
New or revised information:
• Company name change to Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc., a Johnson & Johnson Company
• Revised Safeguards and Precautions
• Revised Maintenance Logs (Chapter 2)
• Revision to scanner window cleaning procedure (Chapter 2)
9/96 Reflects software version 5.0.
New or revised information:
• New information for storage of VITROS Reference Fluid reservoirs (Chapter 2)
• Addition to proboscis cleaning procedure (Chapter 2)
• VITROS Immuno-Wash Fluid on-analyzer storage extended to 72 hours (Chapter 2)
• Rate/CM Correction Factor Test screen changes (Chapter 3)
• Daily Maintenance Log (Chapter 3)
4/96 Introduction of Johnson & Johnson VITROS Chemistry Systems trade-mark nomenclature.
5/95 Reflects software versions 4.0 and higher.
New or revised information:
• New analyzer label for clearing slide cartridge jams
• New periodic maintenance logs (Chapter 2)
• Revised reflectometer iris adjustment procedure (Chapters 2, 3)
• Information about MEDs targets that will not appear if a subsystem is disabled (Chapter 3)
• Revised Rate/CM Correction Factors Test procedure (Chapter 3)
• Information about initializing the analyzer with interlocks open (Chapter 5)
• New analyzer program load procedure (Chapter 5)
• New procedure for clearing slide cartridge jams at the slide supply access door (Chapter 5)
• Replacing print heads on the standard Okidata printer (Chapter 6)
• Ordering Parts and Sundries (Chapter 7) removed
• New index
Revision Date Description (Continued)
vi VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Important Safeguards and Precautions
2/1/94 New release. Reflects software version 3.0.
Table of Contents revised.
Revision History and List of Effective Pages added.
Change bars used to mark changes since last revision.
New or revised information:
• Preparing for periodic maintenance (Chapter 2)
• Periodic maintenance procedures (Chapter 2)
— Immuno-Wash Fluid maintenance
— Cleaning the tip locator assembly
— Adjusting the reflectometer iris
— Cleaning the dispense blade/slide path
— Cleaning the incubator evaporation caps and slots
— Replacing the incubator evaporation caps
• Maintenance logs (Chapter 2)
• Diagnostics and MEDS (Chapter 3)
— Rate/CM correction factor test
— Current setup values
— Sample metering performance test
— Immuno-rate metering test
• Clearing slide cartridge jams (Chapter 5)
• Replacing the slide supply dispense blade (Chapter 6)
• Ordering Parts and Sundries (Chapter 7)
1/1/93 First release of manual. Reflects version 1.1 of the software
Revision Date Description (Continued)
Version 2.0 VITRO
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide viiImportant Safeguards and Precautions
VITROS 250/350 System Maintenance and Diagnostics ManualList of Effective Pages
.
viii VITRO
Publication Date Section Page
2005-01-03 All pages in this publication have been revised to reflect Version 2.0
04/04 All pages in this publication have been revised to reflect Version 1.0
Important Safeguards and Precautions Page xviii
Chapter 1 - Welcome Page 1-1
Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance Page 2-6 - 2-9, 2-11, 2-20
Chapter 3- Diagnostics Page 3-126
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting Page 5-1
10/01 Contents Pages i-iii
Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance Pages 46, Daily Maintenance Log
1/00 All pages listed below should be at publication date 1/00.
Chapter 3 - Diagnostics Pages 31-32
Chapter 6 - Replacing Parts Page 9
6/98 All pages listed below should be at publication date 6/98.
Important Safeguards and Precautions Pages viii, xviii
Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance Maintenance LogsPages 71-74
Chapter 3 - Diagnostics All pages
Chapter 4 - Environmental Monitoring Page 1
9/96 All pages listed below should be at publication date 9/96.All other pages should be at publication date 5/95. Reprinted 4/96 or 2/1/94. Reprinted 4/96.
Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance All pages
Daily Maintenance Log
Chapter 3 - Diagnostics Pages 21-22
5/95 All pages listed below should be at publication date 5/95.All other pages should be at publication date 2/1/94. Reprinted 5/95.
Important Safeguards and Precautions Pages iii–vi, x, xi
Contents All pages
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance Pages 45, 45.a, 45.b, 46, Maintenance Logs
Chapter 3 - Diagnostics Pages 4, 14, 15, 19, 20, 21- 23, 23.a, 23.b, 23.c, 23.d, 24, 25, 25.a, 25.b, 26
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting Pages 7, 13, 14, 25, 25.a, 25.b, 25.c, 25.d
Chapter 6 - Replacing Pages Pages 11-14
Chapter 7 Removed
Index All pages
2/1/94 All sections All pages
Publication Date Section Page
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide ix
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Laser Light Warning
Important Safeguards andPrecautions
Laser Light Warning
x VITRO
The VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System, with Positive Sample Identification (PSID) installed, uses a Class II Visible Laser Diode that emits a low-power laser beam. Brief eye exposure to the beam will not cause any known biological harm, but you should not stare directly into the laser beam, just as you would not stare at the sun. Use caution to avoid exposing your eyes to a reflection of the laser beam. Do not place any reflecting surface in the path of the beam when the equipment is in operation.
Only qualified service personnel should perform alignments, adjustments, and disassembly procedures. Use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
The following warning appears in the Reference Set.
WARNINGAvoid directly and continually exposing your eyes to the laser beam, or a reflection of the laser beam.
Laser Light Safety Label
The laser light safety label is located on the PSID scanner.LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED FROM THIS APERTURE
CAUTION – LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT AVOID LONG TERM VIEWING OF
DIRECT LASER RADIATION
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Electrical Hazards
Electrical Hazards
Version 2.0 VITRO
Potential electrical hazards exist behind the side, front, and back panels. Keep doors, covers, and panels closed during normal operation for your own protection and to maintain analyzer temperature.
Do not operate the analyzer if any of the modules have been removed. Removing modules from their normal positions may create electrical hazards. This includes slide supply, sample metering, sample handler (tip supply, mixing cup supply, tray transport, sample supply, diluent supply), reference fluid metering, incubator, reflectometer, and electrometer modules.
Scanner Safeguards
The scanner component used for Positive Sample Identification (PSID) is an integralpart of the system. Only qualified service personnel should perform alignments, adjustments, and disassembly procedures of the PSID scanner component.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide xi
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Analyzer Labels
Analyzer Labels
xii VITRO
Listed below are the agency-approved, warning, safety, and miscellaneous labels on the analyzer. Illustrations showing their location follow.
• Name Plate: Sample Handler
• Name Plate: Slide Processor
• Slide Supply
— Analyzer Options
— Hardware Modifications: Slide Processor
— Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams
• Hardware Modifications: Sample Handler
• Reset
• Biohazard (Slide Disposal Box)
• Biohazard (Mixing Cup Array and Tip Disposal Box)
• Cartridge Disposal Box
• Ground Symbol
• Hot Surface (Lamp)
• Hot Surface
• Refer to Manual
• Volume Control/Iris Adjustment
• Laser Compliance
• Laser Light Safety
• Leakage Current
• FCC
• CDOC (Canadian)
• VFG (Verflugen)
• High Voltage
• 120-Volt Printer
• 120-Volt Monitor
• Ports
• Mechanical Pinch Point
• Rotor Assembly Disk
• Electrolyte Reference Fluid (ERF)
• Immuno-Wash Fluid (IWF)
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Analyzer Labels
Name Plate: Sample Handler
Name Plate: Slide Processor
Slide Supply: – Analyzer Options– Hardware Modifications: Slide Supply– Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams
Made in Germany for Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. Rochester, New York 14626-5101
SERIALNUMBER
SERVICECODE
50/60Hz 12A
3331
50/60Hz 6A
100 - 120V~
200 - 240V~
2505
LISTED
R
3D90
R
TÜV RheinlandgeprüfteSicherheit
CLASSIFICATION
Made by Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.Rochester, New York 14626-5101
SERIALNUMBER
SERVICECODE 3332 2501XXXX
CnP
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide xiii
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Analyzer Labels
Hardware Modifications: Sample Handler
Reset
HARDWARE
MODIFICATIONKODAK
xiv VITRO
Biohazard (Slide Disposal Box)
Program Load / Reset
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Analyzer Labels
Biohazard (Mixing Cup Array and Tip Disposal Box)
Cartridge Disposal Box
Ground Symbol
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide xv
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Analyzer Labels
Hot Surface (Lamp)
Hot Surface
Refer to Manual
xvi VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Analyzer Labels
Volume Control/Iris Adjustment
Laser Compliance (only with PSID installed)
Laser Light Safety (only with PSID installed)
Ortho-Clinical DiagnosticsRochester, NY 14626-5101
LASER RADIATION IS EMITTED FROM THIS APERTURE
CAUTION – LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.
CLASS 2 LASER PRODUCT AVOID LONG TERM VIEWING OF
DIRECT LASER RADIATION
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide xvii
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Analyzer Labels
Leakage Current
FCC
CDOC (Canadian)
CAUTION HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT
ENSURE PROPER GROUNDING
ATTENTION COURANT DE FUITE ÉLEVÉ
FOURNIR UNE MISE
A LA TERRE EFFICACE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Le présent apparell numérique n’émet pas de brulis radio-électriques dépas-sant les limites appli-cables aux apparells numériques de la classe B prescrites dans le Réglement sur le brouillage ra-dioélectrique édicté par le ministére des Communications du Canada.
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Reg-ulations of the Canadian Depart-ment of Communi-cations. PN 356409
xviii VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Analyzer Labels
High Voltage
120-Volt Printer
120-Volt Monitor
Ports
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide xix
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Analyzer Labels
Mechanical Pinch Point
Rotor Assembly Disk
Electrolyte Reference Fluid (ERF)
Immuno-Wash Fluid (IWF)
Inside Top View
ATTENTIONAfter removing the rotor assy,place the label side down to
protect the surface of the disk.
ERF
IWF
xx VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Important Safeguards and Precautions
General Precautions
General Precautions
Version 2.0 VITRO
We recommend that the key operator perform all periodic maintenance procedures.
Moving Parts
Wherever there are moving parts, such as the dispense blade, slide supply rotors, and the incubator disk, use caution when correcting malfunctions and when operating the analyzer. When either of the covers of the VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System are raised, interlock switches prevent the movement of any high-speed or high-power modules. Other modules are still operational.Cleaning Solutions
Do not use any solvents or cleaning solutions on the equipment other than distilled or deionized water. Never use ammonia cleaners on or near the analyzer.CAUTION: Do not use solvents, alcohol, ammonia, glass cleaners, or cleaning agents containing abrasives to clean the control unit monitor. These items will damage the touch screen and impair your ability to inter-act with the analyzer computer.
CAUTION: Do not use solvents, alcohol, ammonia, glass cleaners, or cleaning agents containing abrasives to clean the incubator evaporation caps. These items will damage the caps and affect system performance.
CAUTION: Do not touch or clean the Spectralon reference material.
WARNING: Dispose of paper towels and cotton swabs used to clean the analyzer following biohazard procedures. These items may be contaminated with serum or other body fluids.
Clean contaminated analyzer components using a 70 percent isopropyl alcohol in water solution when suggested in the following maintenance procedures. Be sure to use no more than a 70 percent concentrated solution. It is critical that enough water is present to hydrolyze and thus break down proteins.
NOTE: Do not contaminate any other fluids (for example, VITROS 250/350 System Reference Fluid) with isopropyl alcohol solution. NO fluids used on the analyzer should be contaminated with isopropyl alcohol solution or erroneous results will occur. Rinse all components thoroughly with warm distilled or deionized water to remove all traces of isopropyl alcohol.
Do not autoclave any component unless autoclaving is specifically indicated to be an acceptable alternative.
NOTE: You may leave the analyzer on, unless specified otherwise; but do not process samples while you perform maintenance procedures.
Moving the Equipment
Only authorized field personnel are permitted to move equipment from one locationto another. If the equipment is moved, it should be checked by authorized personnel. The equipment should also be checked if any unusual vibration has occurred that may affect it (for example, heavy construction nearby or earthquake).
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide xxi
xxii VITRO
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Moving the Equipment
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
1 Welcome
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
The VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System will provide optimum performance when you use it according to recommended operating and periodic maintenance instructions. (See the Operator’s Manual and the Quick Guide of the Reference Set for the operating instructions, and Chapter 2, “Periodic Maintenance” in this volume.) Be sure to perform all daily, weekly, and as-required maintenance procedures to keep your equipment running efficiently and to ensure reliable results. Sample maintenance logs are provided at the end of Chapter 2 for your convenience. Complete a maintenance log each time you perform maintenance procedures.
Should you encounter any difficulties in daily operation of the equipment, consult Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” or Chapter 5, “Troubleshooting,” in this volume. Should you encounter further difficulties, contact your Customer Support Representative for assistance.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 1–1
Welcome
1–2 VITROS 250/350 C
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.02 Periodic Maintenance
Preparing for Periodic Maintenance
Version 2.0 VITRO
This chapter provides you with information for maintaining the VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System. It is divided into three parts—daily, weekly, and as-required maintenance.
NOTE: You may leave the analyzer on, unless specified otherwise; but do not process samples while you perform maintenance procedures.
After performing each maintenance procedure, make a record of it on a maintenance log. There are sample logs at the end of this chapter and in the Operator’s Quick Guide. You may copy them for your use, or you may want to establish a customized maintenance log for your own laboratory.
If questions arise on maintenance and diagnostics during daily operation of the analyzer, read the manual carefully. If you still need assistance, contact your Customer Support Representative.
WARNING: Assume that all used equipment is contaminated with potentially infectious biological material. Use the “Universal Precautions” rec-ommended by OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administra-tion) Bloodborne Pathogen Standard 29CFR1910.1030 when handling or cleaning equipment. In particular:
•Wear gloves, closed shoes, buttoned lab coats, and safety glasses throughout the cleaning and maintenance process.
•Treat all waste materials used in the cleaning process as contaminated. Follow the site procedures for your laboratory to dispose of these materials.
•Handle all equipment with care. Mechanical parts may have edges, pinch points, and corners that could potentially cause injury.
Refer to the “Important Safeguards and Precautions” at the beginning of this manual for more information. In addition, refer to the NCCLS guidelines for “Protection of Laboratory Workers from Instrument Biohazards” (NCCLS Document M29-A).
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–1
Periodic Maintenance
Preparing for Periodic Maintenance
2–2 VITROS 250/350 C
To access the Periodic Maintenance screen and begin using the periodic maintenance features, touch PERIODIC MAINTENANCE on the Main Menu.
Instructions on using the daily, weekly, and as-required maintenance features follow.
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PM00A
HELPRETURN
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
> Touch a target to select a category.
DAILY MAINTENANCE
WEEKLY MAINTENANCE
AS REQUIRED MAINTENANCE
Categories:
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Daily Maintenance
Daily Maintenance P
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
erform daily maintenance each day before processing samples.
Disposals and Supplies T
o perform daily maintenance for disposals and supplies:1. Touch DAILY MAINTENANCE on the Periodic Maintenance screen.
2. Touch DISPOSALS AND SUPPLIES.
3. Perform the daily maintenance procedures shown on the screen. Instructions follow.
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PM00B
HELPRETURN
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily
> Touch a target to select a category.
DISPOSALSAND
SUPPLIES
FLUIDS
Categories
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PM00C
HELPRETURN
EMPTY: 1. Mixing Cup and Tip Disposal Container. 2. Slide Cartridge Disposal Container. 3. Slide Disposal Container.
INSPECT: 1. Sample Trays for cleanliness/damage.
LOAD: 1. Mixing Cup Array in the Cup Supply. 2. Tips in the Tip Supply.
VERIFY: 1. Slide Inventory on the Analyzer. 2. QC Fluids are run on Slide Lots to be used.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–3
Periodic Maintenance
Emptying Disposal Boxes
Emptying Disposal Boxes
2–4 VITROS 250/350 C
There are three disposal boxes located behind the two front doors of the analyzer. You must empty them daily.
NOTES: Be sure testing is complete and sampling is OFF before you empty the disposal boxes. The analyzer does not prevent removal of the boxes while tests are in process. If the mixing-cup array and tip disposal box is removed while sampling is on or if the slide-disposal box is removed while tests are in process, the disposal box tracks may become contaminated.
The slide disposal box holds approximately 800 slides. High-volume laboratories may need to empty the box more often than once a day.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Emptying Disposal Boxes
To empty the disposal boxes:
1. Open the two front doors of the analyzer.
2. Remove the three disposal boxes (the mixing cup array and tip disposal box, the slide disposal box, and the cartridge disposal box) from the analyzer.
3. The mixing cup array and tip disposal box and the slide disposal box contain liners. Discard the two liners and their contents following your established laboratory procedures for the disposal of biohazardous materials.
Slide-Disposal Box
Cartridge-Disposal BoxMixing-Cup Array
andTip-Disposal Box
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–5
Periodic Maintenance
Emptying Disposal Boxes
2–6 VITROS 250/350 C
4. Discard the contents of the cartridge disposal box according to your laboratory’s procedures. The cartridge disposal box does not receive biohazardous waste.
5. If any of the disposal boxes are contaminated with body fluids, clean them as follows:
— Clean the boxes using 70 percent isopropyl alcohol in water solution.
— Rinse the boxes thoroughly with warm water.
— Allow the boxes to air dry thoroughly.
6. Place a new liner in the slide disposal box. Use a Slide Disposal Box Liner, Cat. No. 120-4791.
7. Reinsert the slide disposal box into the analyzer. Push the disposal box as far as possible to the rear of the analyzer.
8. Place a new liner in the mixing-cup array and tip disposal box. Use a VITROS Disposal Box Liner CM/Cup Array, Cat. No. 125-0273.
9. Reinsert the mixing cup array and tip disposal box into the analyzer. Push the disposal box as far as possible to the rear of the analyzer.
10. Reinsert the cartridge disposal box. This box does not receive biohazardous waste; therefore, it does not require a liner.
11. Close the two front doors.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning Sample Trays
Cleaning Sample Trays
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Inspect the sample trays for any damage such as cracks or missing parts. Using damaged trays can result in sample metering problems. Replace them, if necessary.
To clean the sample trays:
1. Wash soiled trays in warm, soapy water.
2. Rinse with water to remove any soap residue.
3. Clean contaminated trays using 70 percent isopropyl alcohol in water solution.
4. Rinse the trays thoroughly with warm water.
5. Allow the trays to air dry thoroughly. Do not autoclave the trays.
Universal Sample Tray
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–7
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning Height, Cup, and PCS Microcollection Tube Adapters
Cleaning Height, Cup, and PCS Microcollection Tube Adapters
2–8 VITROS 250/350 C
To clean height, cup, and tube adapters:
1. Wash soiled adapters in warm, soapy water.
2. Rinse with water to remove any soap residue.
3. Clean contaminated adapters using 70 percent isopropyl alcohol in water solution.
4. Rinse the adapters thoroughly with warm water.
5. Allow the adapters to air dry thoroughly. Do not autoclave the adapters.
Universal Sample Tray
Cup Adapter
Height Adapter
Microcollection Tube Adapter
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Loading Mixing Cup Arrays and Tips
Loading Mixing Cup Arrays and Tips
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
To load mixing-cup arrays and sample tips:
1. From the front of the analyzer, slide the mixing cup arrays onto the transport belt of the mixing cup array supply. The supply holds a maximum of five trays.
2. Place the VITROS VersaTips into the Tip Rack.
3. Load the tip rack onto the transport belts of the tip supply. The supply holds a maximum of four racks.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–9
Periodic Maintenance
Verifying Slide Inventory
Verifying Slide Inventory
2–10 VITROS 250/350 C
You can use the slide inventory feature to display the total number of slides loaded for each test and lot number. This daily step allows you to evaluate slide inventory and manage slide lots, keep an adequate supply of calibrated slides on the analyzer to avoid unnecessary stops during sample processing, and know when a slide lot will run out to plan calibration or quality control.
When you transfer data from a new calibration diskette, the new diskette may not support some of the slides currently loaded on the analyzer if their generations have expired. These slides will not appear on the Slide Inventory screen.
To verify slide inventory on the analyzer:
1. Press the (F2) function key on the keyboard to display the Cartridge Handling dialogue.
2. Touch SLIDE INVENTORY in the Display column
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
CH01A
CARTRIDGE HANDLING
Unload:
ALLEMPTY
CARTRIDGES
BYPOSITION
BYTEST / LOT
ALLCARTRIDGESBY SUPPLY
SLIDESUPPLY
CONTENTS
Display:
BYPOSITION
MANUALLOT #
ENTRY
Load:
NEWGEN
SLIDEINVENTORY
Nov 02 92
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Verifying QC Fluids are Run on Slide Lots
3. Compare the total number of slides available against what you anticipate needing for your daily run.
4. Touch RETURN twice to return to Periodic Maintenance.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250CH01BCARTRIDGE HANDLING - Inventory
PAGE 1 of 4Test :
ALBAMYLCHOL (HDLC)Cl-ECO2GLUK+Na+TPTRIGURICdHDL
Total Slide Count : Lot Number :
0832-4655 4003-4566
PRINTINVENTORY
NEXTPAGE
PREVIOUSPAGE
> Touch NEXT PAGE for more inventory data. Touch PRINT INVENTORY toprint the inventory data.
4954515257
0 46 48 50 575746
Cal'd Fluid:
S/U
S/U
S/U
Current :
SS
OFFON
Jul 15 92
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
S
1191-1111 S
SS
0928-53846015-2964
5707-2659
0512-35890722-29340635-41244223-43481 4102-7161
S
S/U
S
S SS/U
S
S/US/USSSS/U
Verifying QC Fluids are Run on Slide Lots C
l
heck and verify that quality control fluids have been run on the slideots you will be using. Run quality control fluids as part of your daily maintenance after performing all other daily maintenance procedures. Minimum frequency for monitoring the performance of the analyzer and slides is once every 24 hours. (State and/or local regulations may require more frequent performance checks.)
For a detailed explanation of the quality control feature, refer to Chapter 11, “Quality Control,” in the Operator’s Manual.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–11
Periodic Maintenance
Reference Fluid
Reference Fluid T
2–12 VITROS 250/350 C
o perform the daily maintenance procedure for reference fluid:
1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
2. Touch PERIODIC MAINTENANCE on the Main Menu.
3. Touch DAILY MAINTENANCE.
4. Touch FLUIDS.
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PM00B
HELPRETURN
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily
> Touch a target to select a category.
DISPOSALSAND
SUPPLIES
FLUIDS
Categories
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Reference Fluid
5. Touch REFERENCE FLUID. The reference metering arm will lift out of the reservoir to the tip-change position. The screen instructs you to change the tip and the reservoir.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00D
REFERENCEFLUID
DILUENTS
Fluids:
IMMUNO-WASHFLUID
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily
Aug 23 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a fluid.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–13
Periodic Maintenance
Reference Fluid
2–14 VITROS 250/350 C
NOTE: You must change the VITROS Micro Tip every eight hours. You must change the Reference Fluid Reservoir and clean the reference fluid reservoir cover seal every 24 hours. Bring a fresh, unopened disposable reservoir to analyzer temperature before use. Do this by placing the reservoir on top of the incubator cover for a minimum of 30 minutes.
An unrefrigerated reservoir is stable for 24 hours. Reservoirs that will not be used right away should remain refrigerated.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00EPERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily
Immuno-Wash Fluid:
1. Change Tip. 2. Change Reservoir.
CURRENT RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 258
May 19 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Was the fluid reservoir replaced?
NEW RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 300
(Y/N):
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Reference Fluid
6. Swing up the arm so that it forms a right angle with the reference-metering assembly.
7. With one hand, pull the lever to eject the tip. Be prepared to catch the tip with your other hand as it ejects.
8. Wipe the reference proboscis (which holds the VITROS Micro Tip in place) with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water.
9. Dry it with another lint-free cloth.
10. Steady the arm with one hand. Insert a new micro tip by pushing it firmly into place. You will hear a click.
Reference Metering Arm
Reference Metering Assembly
LeverVITROS Micro Tip
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–15
Periodic Maintenance
Reference Fluid
2–16 VITROS 250/350 C
11. Replace the reservoir.
— Lift the retainer lid that holds the reservoir.
— Remove the old reservoir and discard it.
— Wipe out the housing using a lint-free cloth.
— Mix the reservoir thoroughly by gentle inversion.
— Peel the protective seal off the reservoir after it has reached room temperature.
— Place the reservoir into the reservoir housing.
WARNING: Do not place the reference fluid reservoir into the Immuno-Wash Fluid reservoir housing. Error codes may occur during immuno-rate Sample Processing.
12. Remove the reference fluid reservoir cover.
13. Remove the seal from the bottom of the reservoir cover, and clean it with distilled or deionized water.
Reference Fluid Reservoir
Housing
Cover
BOTTOM OF RESERVOIR COVER
Seal
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Reference Fluid
14. Wipe the cover with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water.
15. Dry the cover and seal thoroughly, being careful not to leave any lint or fibers.
16. Insert a clean seal on the cover, and return the cover to its normal operating position.
17. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to answer the prompt, “Was the fluid reservoir replaced?”
18. Touch RETURN. The reference arm assembly will return to the “home” position, and the screen will display the fluid drop count update.
19. Touch RETURN. The analyzer will initialize.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00EPERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily
Immuno-Wash Fluid:
1. Change Tip. 2. Change Reservoir.
CURRENT RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 258
May 19 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Was the fluid reservoir replaced?
NEW RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 300
(Y/N):
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–17
Periodic Maintenance
Diluents
Diluents N
2–18 VITROS 250/350 C
OTE: Fresh diluent fluids must be at room temperature. See the VITROS Instructions for Use for on-board stability.
To perform daily maintenance for diluents:
1. Touch FLUIDS on the Periodic Maintenance – Daily screen.
2. Touch DILUENTS. The diluent tray carrier is moved toward the front of the analyzer.
3. Remove the tray through the diluent supply opening in the front of the analyzer.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00D
REFERENCEFLUID
DILUENTS
Fluids:
IMMUNO-WASHFLUID
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily
Aug 23 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a fluid.
Diluent Supply Opening
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Diluents
4. Remove the old diluents, if any, and discard them.
We supply 7% BSA/Bovine Serum Albumin and VITROS Urine Electrolyte Diluent in glass bottles designed to fit onto the diluent tray. It may be advantageous to transfer aliquots of these diluents to 2 mL sample cups (without caps). Simply put the cup onto the diluent tray, and the tray’s stopper will prevent evaporation. Several empty bottles are provided for distilled water and saline.
NOTE: The seven percent BSA and the Urine Electrolyte Diluents can remain on the diluent tray no longer than seven days.
5. Remove and clean the rubber stoppers every time a bottle is removed or inserted. Replace any stoppers that are cracked or damaged.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00F
1. Place fluids in positionas shown.2. Load Diluent Tray on the Analyzer.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - DAILY
Diluent Configuration - Tray A
2ml 2ml 2ml 2ml 5ml 5ml 10ml 10ml
PAT PAT SALN ABSA SPEC 7BSA H20 ELEC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch RETURN to reload the Diluent Tray.
Stopper
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–19
Periodic Maintenance
Diluents
2–20 VITROS 250/350 C
NOTE: Wear clean gloves when you clean and replace the stoppers to prevent finger oil or contaminated gloves from contaminating the stoppers.
6. Locate a new stopper. The stoppers have two grooves on the top surface. Hold the stopper flat side down, and insert the top groove into the gap on the diluent tray stopper holder.
7. After replacing as many stoppers as required, place fresh, room-temperature diluent fluids in positions shown on the screen.
8. Load the diluent tray back onto the diluent tray carrier.
9. Touch RETURN, and the diluent tray will return automatically to its “home” position.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00F
1. Place fluids in positionas shown.2. Load Diluent Tray on the Analyzer.
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - DAILY
Diluent Configuration - Tray A
2ml 2ml 2ml 2ml 5ml 5ml 10ml 10ml
PAT PAT SALN ABSA SPEC 7BSA H20 ELEC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch RETURN to reload the Diluent Tray.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Configuring the Diluent Tray
Configuring the Diluent Tray
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
To configure the diluent tray if the current configuration does not meet your needs:
1. Touch OPTIONS on the Main Menu.
2. Type the access code using the keyboard, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
3. Touch ANALYZER CONFIG in the System Services column.
4. Touch DILUENT TRAY CONFIG in the Tests column.
Jul 15 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP00B
> Touch a target to select an option.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONSSystem Services
SUBSYSTEMCONTROL
ANALYZERCONFIG
SPECIALSERVICES
REPORTCONTROL
WORKLOAD& USAGEREPORTS
Disk Srvcs
LOADCAL
DISKETTE
DISKFILE
SERVICES
BACKUP/RESTOREDISKETTE
Cal Data
CALPARAMS
CALIBRATORSAVs
CALIBRATORLOT #
SELECTION
Test Data
TEST/FLUID
CONFIG
DILUENTDATA
COEF&
LIMITS
ADDITIONALTESTS
CONFIG
PRINTCONFIGREPORT
Jul 15 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP00E
> Touch a target to select a category.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONS – Analyzer ConfigurationMemory
LANGUAGE CONFIG
SAMPLE PROGRAM RETENTION
RESULT RECORD
RETENTION
ReportsTests
DILUENT TRAY
CONFIG
TEST REPORTING
CONFIG
Functions
STATUS CONSOLE
ANALYZER NAME
CONFIG
LAB COMPUTER
CONFIG
PATIENT REPORT CONFIG
LAB REPORT CONFIG
PRINTER REPORT CONFIG
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–21
Periodic Maintenance
Configuring the Diluent Tray
2–22 VITROS 250/350 C
5. To add diluents or to change the current diluent tray setup, touch a diluent tray position target.
6. Type the diluent name abbreviation (up to four characters) desired in that position, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
7. Touch another tray position target to continue updating the diluent tray configuration.
8. To cancel any changes made, touch RETURN.
9. To save the updated configuration, touch ENTER TRAY CONFIG.
10. Touch RETURN to exit.
Aug 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP31Q
> To add diluents or to change the current tray setup, touch a tray postion; type diluent name desired in that position, then press ENTER.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONS – Analyzer Configuration
ENTER TRAY
CONFIG
Diluent Tray Configuration
Diluent Configuration – Tray A
2ml 2ml 2ml 2ml 5ml 5ml 10ml 10ml
PAT PAT SALN ABSA H20 H20 7BSA ELEC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Immuno-Wash Fluid
Immuno-Wash Fluid T
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
o perform daily maintenance for immuno-wash fluid:
1. Touch FLUIDS on the Periodic Maintenance-Daily screen.
2. Touch IMMUNO-WASH FLUID.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00D
REFERENCEFLUID
DILUENTS
Fluids:
IMMUNO-WASHFLUID
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily
Aug 23 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a fluid.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00EPERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily
Immuno-Wash Fluid:
1. Change Tip. 2. Change Reservoir.
CURRENT RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 258
May 19 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Was the fluid reservoir replaced?
NEW RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 300
(Y/N):
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–23
Periodic Maintenance
Immuno-Wash Fluid
2–24 VITROS 250/350 C
NOTE: You must change the VITROS Micro Tip every eight hours. You must change the Immuno-Wash Fluid Reservoir at least every 72 hours, and clean the reservoir cover seal every 24 hours. Bring a fresh, unopened disposable reservoir to analyzer temperature before use. Do this by placing the reservoir on top of the incubator cover for a minimum of 30 minutes before use.
Return any unopened reservoirs to the refrigerator if you will not use them immediately.
3. Swing up the arm so that it forms a right angle with the immuno-rate metering assembly.
4. With one hand, pull the lever to eject the tip. Be prepared to catch the tip with your other hand as it ejects.
Immuno-Rate Metering Arm
Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly
LeverVITROS Micro Tip
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Immuno-Wash Fluid
5. Wipe the immuno-rate proboscis (which holds the VITROS Micro Tip in place) with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water.
6. Dry it with another lint-free cloth.
7. Steady the arm with one hand. Insert a new micro tip by pushing it firmly into place. You will hear a click.
8. Replace the reservoir.
— Lift the IR metering arm.
— Lift the retainer lid that holds the reservoir.
— Remove the old reservoir and discard it.
— Wipe out the housing using a lint-free cloth.
— Mix the reservoir thoroughly by gentle inversion.
— Peel the protective seal off the top of the reservoir after it has reached room temperature.
— Place the reservoir into the reservoir housing. The reservoir will have a yellow label and the housing will have a yellow dot.
WARNING: Do not place the Immuno-Wash Fluid reservoir into the reference fluid reservoir housing. Biased electrolyte results may occur.
9. Remove the wash fluid reservoir cover.
Immuno-Wash Fluid Reservoir
Cover
Housing
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–25
Periodic Maintenance
Immuno-Wash Fluid
2–26 VITROS 250/350 C
10. Remove the seal from the bottom of the reservoir cover, and clean it with distilled or deionized water.
11. Wipe the cover with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water.
12. Dry the cover and seal thoroughly, being careful not to leave any lint or fibers.
13. Insert a clean seal on the cover, and return the cover to its normal operating position.
14. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to answer the prompt, “Was the fluid reservoir replaced?”
15. Touch RETURN. The immuno-rate arm assembly will return to the “home” position, and the screen will display the fluid drop count update.
16. Touch RETURN. The analyzer will initialize.
BOTTOM OF RESERVOIR COVER
Seal
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00EPERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Daily
Immuno-Wash Fluid:
1. Change Tip. 2. Change Reservoir.
CURRENT RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 300
May 19 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Was the fluid reservoir replaced?
NEW RESERVOIR DROP COUNT VALUE: 300
(Y/N):
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance
Weekly Maintenance T
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
o display the weekly maintenance procedures:
1. Touch PERIODIC MAINTENANCE on the Main Menu.
2. Touch WEEKLY MAINTENANCE.
3. Perform the weekly maintenance procedures displayed on the screen. Instructions follow.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00H
CLEAN:
1. Tray platform and transport arm.2. Tip locator assembly.3. Cup retainer.4. Control unit screen / keypad cover.
INSPECT:
1. Sample Metering path for cleanliness.
2. Air filter.
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - Weekly
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–27
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Tray Platform and Transport Arm
Cleaning the Tray Platform and Transport Arm T
2–28 VITROS 250/350 C
o clean the tray platform and transport arm:
1. Lift the top left cover.
2. Moisten a lint-free cloth with distilled water. Wipe the top and sides of the tray platform and transport arm.
3. Dry them with another lint-free cloth.
4. Clean and dry the tray hook in the same manner.
Tray Platform
Transport Arm
Tray Hook
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly
Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly C
o
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
lean the tip-locator assembly to remove glue deposits as well as any ther type of contamination left from slides.
1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
2. Open the incubator cover.
Incubator Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–29
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly
2–30 VITROS 250/350 C
3. Loosen the one thumbscrew that secures the tip-locator assembly cover to the tip-locator assembly.
4. Remove the tip-locator cover, and set it aside.
5. Loosen the three thumbscrews on the tip-locator assembly.
Tip-LocatorAssembly Cover
Tip-Locator Assembly
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly
6. Turn over the tip-locator assembly. Use the edge of a spare slide to remove any glue deposits from the slide block area on the underside of the tip-locator assembly. Discard the slide when you are finished.
7. Wipe the rest of the tip-locator assembly with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. Avoid touching electrical parts. Use light pressure only.
8. Moisten a cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. Use the swab to clean the area under the tip-locator assembly (anywhere fluid has spilled). Avoid touching electrical parts.
9. Moisten a cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. Use the swab to clean the top of the tip-locator assembly.
Tip-Locator Assembly
TIP LOCATOR ASSEMBLY
Clean area with swab
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–31
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly
2–32 VITROS 250/350 C
10. Allow the assembly to air-dry. Before replacing the tip-locator assembly and cover, continue with the remaining cleaning steps.
11. Moisten a cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. Use the swab to clean the elevator.
12. Place the transverse shuttle into the tip-locator assembly.
13. Replace the tip-locator assembly, and hand tighten the three thumbscrews.
14. Replace the tip-locator cover, and hand tighten the one thumbscrew.
15. Close the incubator cover.
16. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
Elevator
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Tip-Locator Assembly
17. Touch the status console at the top of the monitor to bring up the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
18. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules.
19. Run and evaluate quality control (QC) fluids to ensure that all the chemistries are performing correctly.
RELEV ERR
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ER01A
DOWN INITIALIZEUP
SHUTDOWN
MALFUNCTION
ACTION
ATTENTION
TRANSIENT
8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open
11:00:18 Code: 3S6 38 141
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar.
8/17/93 MALFUNCTIONSCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–33
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Cup Retainer
Cleaning the Cup Retainer T
2–34 VITROS 250/350 C
o clean the cup retainer:
1. Lift the top left cover.
2. Moisten a lint-free cloth with distilled or deionized water, and wipe the top and bottom of the cup retainer.
3. Dry it with another lint-free cloth.
Cup Retainer
Cleaning the Touchscreen Monitor/Flat LCD Touchscreen Monitor
To clean the touchscreen monitor:
1. Touch an area of the touchscreen without buttons and continue touching.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Keypad Cover
2. Wipe the touchscreen and touchscreen frame with a lint-free cloth moistened with warm, soapy water, as shown.
CAUTION: Do not use solvents, ammonia, glass cleaners, or cleaning agents containing abrasives to clean the touchscreen.
Figure 2-1. Cleaning the Touchscreen Monitor
3. Wipe the touchscreen and touchscreen frame with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water to remove any soap residue.
4. If necessary, clean the touchscreen and touchscreen frame with a lint-free cloth dampened with 70% isopropyl alcohol-in-water solution.
5. Discontinue touching the area of the touchscreen without buttons.
6. Allow the touchscreen and touchscreen frame to air dry thoroughly.
Cleaning the Keypad Cover Cw
lean the keypad cover with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled ater.
Backup QC, Config, and Calibration Data F
M
ollow the procedure found in Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Operator’s anual.hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–35
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Sample-Metering Path
Cleaning the Sample-Metering Path E
p
2–36 VITROS 250/350 C
xamine the area under the path traveled by the sample metering roboscis. Look for signs of spilled or dried reagents or serum.
To clean the sample metering path:
1. Lift both top covers.
2. Moisten a lint-free cloth or cotton swab with distilled or deionized water.
3. Clean the affected area.
4. Dry the area thoroughly being careful not to leave any lint or cotton fibers behind.
5. Dispose of the cleaning materials in a biohazardous waste box.
Sample-Metering Proboscis
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Inspecting the Air Filter
Inspecting the Air Filter Tt
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
he analyzer uses a washable air filter. You may want to have one or wo spares so that you can rotate them after cleaning.
To inspect and replace the air filter:
1. Open the right front door of the analyzer.
2. Locate the air filter in the lower right corner.
3. Look for signs of dust or dirt coating the exposed surface of the filter. This could compromise air flow into the analyzer and eventually lead to temperature errors.
4. If the filter is dirty, remove it and replace it with a spare filter. The air filter is held in place by a hook-and-loop type fastening system.
5. Clean the dirty filter. Remove heavy dust buildup by hand or brush, then wash the filter in water and allow it to air dry. When dry, it will be ready to reuse when the current filter becomes dirty.
IMPORTANT: Do not install a wet or damp filter. It could cause tem-perature problems by reducing air flow. Allow filters to dry thoroughly before use.
Air Filter
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–37
Periodic Maintenance
As-Required Maintenance
As-Required Maintenance T
2–38 VITROS 250/350 C
o display the as-required maintenance procedures:
1. Touch PERIODIC MAINTENANCE on the Main Menu.
2. Touch AS REQUIRED MAINTENANCE.
Instructions for these periodic maintenance procedures together with additional as-required maintenance procedures follow.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
PM00I
REPLACE:
1. Salt pads in slide supply 1.2. Desiccant packs in slide supply 2.3. Reflectometer lamp.4. Proboscis/sample metering tubing.
CLEAN:
1.
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE - As Required
Slide discard chutes.2. Analyzer cabinetry.3. Dispense blade/slide path.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Replacing Humidity Control Packs and Desiccant Packs
Replacing Humidity Control Packs and Desiccant Packs R
S
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
eplace humidity control packs when humidity errors are posted for lide Supply 1 or when directed to do so by your Customer Support
Representative for troubleshooting purposes. Replace desiccant packs when humidity errors are posted for Slide Supply 2 or when directed to do so by your Customer Support Representative for troubleshooting purposes.
To replace humidity control packs and desiccant packs:
1. Open the right front door of the analyzer.
Humidity Control and Desiccant Pack Carriers
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–39
Periodic Maintenance
Replacing Humidity Control Packs and Desiccant Packs
2–40 VITROS 250/350 C
2. Remove the carriers for the humidity control packs and desiccant packs, and discard the old pads and packs.
— Pull down on the handle of each carrier to unlatch the carriers from the bottom of the slide supplies.
— Pull each carrier straight out of the analyzer.
3. Load new magnesium chloride humidity control packs for Slide Supply 1 (left side).
NOTE: The humidity control packs have no expiration date. They should be slightly moist, but not completely dry. Do not use them if they are extremely wet or completely dry.
4. Load new desiccant (humidity control) packs for Slide Supply 2 (right side).
Pull down, then out
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Replacing Humidity Control Packs and Desiccant Packs
NOTE: There is a blue indicator in each desiccant pack wrapper that ensures the desiccant packs are good; the blue indicator turns pink if the desiccant packs are expired.
IMPORTANT: Do not interchange the carriers when you reinsert them.
5. Return both of the carriers to the slide supplies in the analyzer.
6. Push up on the handle of each carrier to latch it against the bottom of the slide supplies.
7. Close the front door.
Slide Supply 2 –Desiccant packs
Slide Supply 1 –Magnesium-Chloride Salt Pads
Push in, then up
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–41
Periodic Maintenance
Changing the Reflectometer Lamp
Changing the Reflectometer Lamp C
d
2–42 VITROS 250/350 C
hange the reflectometer lamp when the Help text for an error code irects you to do so or when directed by your Customer Support
Representative.
To change the reflectometer lamp, you will need a Reflectometer Lamp Extraction Tool, TL-3372.
1. Open the right front door of the analyzer.
NOTE: Use the lamp replacement label located on the inside of the slide processor front door as an instruction guide. In the instructions that follow, (Illustration #) refers to the illustration number on the label.
2. Remove the cartridge-disposal box. (Illustration 1)
3. Open the lamp safety door. (Illustration 2) The lamp safety door includes an interlock switch that removes power from the lamp.
CAUTION: The lamp is HOT. Wait 15 minutes for the lamp to cool.
4. Press down Tab A to release the lamp socket latch C. (Illustration 3)
Instructions
Cartridge-Disposal Box
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris
5. Grasp the lamp socket, and remove it from the lamp base B. (Illustration 4)
6. Disconnect the lamp socket connector 5A3J/P10. This allows the lamp socket assembly to be removed from the analyzer for easy access on a work surface.
7. Remove the lamp using the extraction tool TL-3372, and discard the lamp. (Illustration 5)
8. Grasp the new lamp using the plastic wrapper to prevent finger oil from contaminating the lamp surface. Insert the new lamp. (Illustration 6)
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the lamp with your fingers. Finger oil will affect system performance.
9. Return the lamp socket to its original position in the lamp base B. (Illustration 7)
10. Press the latch C into the lock position. (Illustration 8)
11. Reconnect the lamp socket connector 5A3J/P10.
12. Close the lamp safety door, and check that the interlock switch has engaged. The lamp will illuminate.
13. Reinsert the cartridge disposal box.
14. Allow the lamp to burn in or stabilize for at least 30 minutes. Then perform the reflectometer iris adjustment procedure that follows.
Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris
1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.DIAGNOSTICS
May 19 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
MD00A
HELPRETURN
SUBSYSTEM TESTS
MEDS
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS
SETUP/ ADJUST
HARDWARE AND CHEM
INFO
PERFORM-ANCE
TESTS
COMPLEX TESTS
LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–43
Periodic Maintenance
Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris
2–44 VITROS 250/350 C
2. Touch SETUP/ADJUST.
3. Touch REFLECTOMETER IRIS.
DIAGNOSTICS - Setup/Adjustments
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
SA00A
LECTUREREAD
SAMPLE
RATE/CM
SLIDE
CURRENT
REFLECT-
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
METERING TRANSPORT IRISOMETER
SYNCCORRECTION
FACTORSETUPVALUES
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Periodic Maintenance
Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris
4. Touch START after you have waited for the lamp to stabilize.
5. When “Center the tool slide? (Y/N)” is displayed on the prompt line, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
IMPORTANT: Do not type “Y” at this prompt. Always type “N” to use the analyzer’s internal reference slide.
6. Touch START. The filter with the highest voltage reading will be displayed. Note and record which filter is displayed.
7. Once the voltage reading is displayed, touch START again.
DIAGNOSTICS - Setup/Adjustment - Reflectometer Iris
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
> Wait 30 minutes if a new lamp was installed.> Touch START to begin.
SA10A
WARNING: If a new lamp has been installed, the lampmust be allowed a 30 minute stabilizing period.Failure to wait the allotted time could result ininaccurate results due to unstable lamp conditions.
RETURNMAIN DIAG
MENUSTART
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–45
Periodic Maintenance
Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris
2–46 VITRO
8. Move the iris control switch to the right or left as required to set the voltage according to the table below. (Refer to illustrations 10 and 11 of the lamp replacement label located on the inside of the right front door as a guide.)
You will be adjusting the voltage of the filter displayed in step 6 above. All other filter voltages will be less than the displayed filter.
• Adjust the displayed filter to within the adjustment guidelines listed in Table 1.
• Verify that all filters fall within the verification guidelines listed in Table 2.
If any of the filters are not within the verification guidelines, you may need to repeat the adjustment procedure.
Table 1. Filter Adjustment Guidelines
Displayed filter wavelength Target voltage
Any filter As high as possible up to 8.0 V
9. Touch DONE.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Periodic Maintenance
Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris
10. The screen displays a summary of the current voltages for all of the wavelengths. Verify that all the filter voltages fall within the range listed in table 2 below.
Table 2. Table 2. Filter Verification Guidelines
Filter wavelength Voltage
All filters 3.5 to 9 V
If any of the filters are not within the range listed in table 2, do the following:
• Repeat the adjustment from step 5.
• If you have just installed a new lamp, reseat the lamp (remove it, turn the prongs around, and reinsert it). Repeat the adjustment procedure starting at step 1.
• Install a new lamp following the procedure “Changing the Reflectometer Lamp” in Chapter 2 of this manual. Repeat the adjustment procedure starting at step 1 after the new lamp has stabilized for at least 30 minutes.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–47
Periodic Maintenance
Adjusting the Reflectometer Iris
2–48 VITR
11. Close the right front door and top covers of the analyzer.
12. Touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU.
13. Touch RETURN to return to the Main Menu. The analyzer will initialize.
14. Record date and initials on the “As Required” section of your Maintenance Log.
15. Run and evaluate quality control (QC) fluids to ensure all tests are performing correctly.
If the QC results are not satisfactory, perform the Rate/CM Correction Factor Test, and recalibrate. Refer to the “Rate/CM Correction Factor Test” in the “Setup/Adjust” section of Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” in this manual.
OS 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Replacing the Sample Metering Tubing
Replacing the Sample Metering Tubing W
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
ARNING: Before attempting this procedure, make sure Sampling is OFF, testing is COMPLETE, and the interlock for the cover has not been overridden. Failure to observe these important steps could result in injury.
To change the tubing:
1. Lift the top left cover.
2. Disconnect the sample-metering tubing from the proboscis, the hole in the bracket, and the metering pump.
Proboscis
Metering PumpTubing
Bracket
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–49
Periodic Maintenance
Replacing the Sample Metering Tubing
2–50 VITROS 250/350 C
3. Cut a piece of 0.030-inch inside diameter tubing to the same length as the old tube. If the old tubing is broken, cut a piece of the new tubing to 6.5 inches in length.
You can find the tubing in your spare parts kit (Part No. 994659), or order Sample Metering tubing sets.
NOTE: If the old tubing simply has a stretched or frayed end, you can cut off the damaged end and reuse the tubing rather than replace it. If you cut the end of the tubing, the length can be no shorter than 5.5 inches. With a tubing length less than 5.5 inches, the proboscis will not be able to reach the bottom of the tubes.
4. Attach the new tubing to the proboscis and the sample metering pump. Make sure the tubing passes through the hole in the bracket and push the tubing firmly onto each fitting as far as possible.
5. Close the cover.
6. Touch the status console to display the error log screen with the INITIALIZE target.
7. Touch INITIALIZE.
8. Touch RETURN to return to the Main Menu. The analyzer is ready for operation.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Discard Chutes
Cleaning the Discard Chutes Cc
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
lean the discard chutes to remove any biohazardous or other type ontamination. Also clean the discard chutes if a slide jam occurs in
one of the discard chutes.
1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
2. Open the incubator cover.
3. Loosen the one thumbscrew that secures the tip-locator assembly cover to the tip-locator assembly.
Incubator Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–51
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Discard Chutes
2–52 VITROS 250/350 C
4. Remove the tip-locator cover, and set it aside.
5. Loosen the three thumbscrews on the tip-locator assembly.
6. Lift the tip-locator assembly and the transverse shuttle out of the way.
7. Loosen the two quarter-turn fasteners on the electrometer.
Tip-LocatorAssembly Cover
Tip-Locator Assembly
Electrometer
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Discard Chutes
8. Lift the electrometer into the maintenance position. Swing down the kickstand for support.
9. Using an applicator stick, dislodge any slides that are stuck in either discard chute. Push the applicator stick straight down the discard chutes.
10. Moisten some cotton swabs with distilled or deionized water. Use these swabs to clean the interior walls of the discard chutes, and allow the discard chutes to air dry.
11. Return the electrometer to its normal operating position, and hand tighten the two quarter-turn fasteners.
Kickstand
Discard Chutes
Electrometer
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–53
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Cabinets
2–54 VITROS 250/350 C
12. Place the transverse shuttle into the tip-locator assembly.
13. Replace the tip-locator assembly, and hand tighten the three thumbscrews.
14. Replace the tip-locator cover, and hand tighten the one thumbscrew.
15. Close the incubator cover.
16. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
17. Touch the status console at the top of the monitor to bring up the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
18. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules.
RELEV ERR
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ER01A
DOWN INITIALIZEUP
SHUTDOWN
MALFUNCTION
ACTION
ATTENTION
TRANSIENT
8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open
11:00:18 Code: 3S6 38 141
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar.
8/17/93 MALFUNCTIONSCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open
Cleaning the Cabinets Wc
ipe the outside cabinet doors and panels of the analyzer with a soft loth dampened with soapy water. Rinse with water to remove soap
residue.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Dispense Blade/Slide Path
Cleaning the Dispense Blade/Slide Path T
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
o clean the dispense blade/slide path:
1. Lift the top right cover.
2. Remove the platen cover from the platen assembly.
— Loosen the two quarter-turn fasteners.
— Lift the platen cover out of the way.
3. Turn the knob in a counterclockwise direction (up) to bring the slide-dispense blade out (toward the center of the incubator).
Platen Cover
Quarter-TurnFastener
Quarter-TurnFastener
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–55
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Dispense Blade/Slide Path
2–56 VITROS 250/350 C
4. Inspect the slide path, platen cover, and dispense blade for dirt—such as dust, powder, etc.
5. Clean any parts, if necessary, using a cotton-tipped swab moistened with distilled or deionized water.
6. Turn the knob in a clockwise direction (down) to retract the slide-dispense blade.
7. Use a cotton-tipped swab moistened with distilled or deionized water to clean the slide path under the dispense blade if necessary.
8. Allow the parts to air dry thoroughly before reassembly.
9. Replace the platen cover.
— Line up the two platen cover quarter-turn fasteners with the holes in the brass platen stop plate.
— Lock the quarter-turn fasteners in place by turning them clock-wise.
10. Perform any remaining weekly maintenance procedures.
Slide-Dispense Blade
Knob
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots
Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots Y
w
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
ou will have to clean the incubator caps and slots periodically or hen directed to do so by your Customer Support Representative. The
time between cleanings will vary based on the amount of PM chemistries run per day on the analyzer. High-volume laboratories may need to perform this procedure every four weeks, whereas lower-volume laboratories may need to do it less frequently.
IMPORTANT: Position 24 contains the white reference slide. Do not remove this cap for cleaning. (If hardware Mod No. 9 is installed, there will be no cap in position 24.)
To clean the incubator evaporation caps:
1. Lift the top right cover.
2. Open the incubator cover.
Incubator Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–57
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots
2–58 VITROS 250/350 C
3. Turn the incubator disk by hand until one of the incubator nest positions is lined up with the labeled slot marked by two raised bars or rails.
4. Push down on the partially-exposed spring that is exposed just below the top lip of the incubator disk. The spring will unlock and pop forward.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment of the spring and pad to each other before removing them.
Incubator Disk
Align
Spring
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots
5. Remove the spring and the white plastic cap under it.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to remove the remaining caps.
7. Use distilled or deionized water to clean the caps you just removed.
NOTE: You must wear gloves when you clean the caps.
— Soak the caps in water and gently rub them with your fingers.
— Pick up a cap with the oval and round indentations facing down, the two small ramps facing up. Gently use (do not scrub) a clean moistened cotton swab to remove dust from the crev-ices. Hold the swab at an angle to the surface being cleaned, and gently rotate the cotton swab between the thumb and forefinger.
— Pat dry with a lint-free cloth.
8. Clean each slot of the incubator disk with a wooden applicator to remove any white residue.
Spring
Cap
Swab
Cap Bottom
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–59
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots
2–60 VITROS 250/350 C
9. Place the cap on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator.
10. Put a spring on top of the cap with the notched area of the spring against the taller post and the shorter half of the spring resting over the shorter post. The longer portion of the spring with the small hole should now be on top.
11. Gently push the cap and spring into the incubator rotor until the upper portion of the spring snaps into place. Verify that the cap and spring are inserted correctly. The spring should lock in place and the cap will have a slight spring-action when pulled forward.
Spring
Cap
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Incubator Evaporation Caps and Slots
12. Turn the incubator disk by hand until one of the slide positions is lined up with the two raised bars. Replace the other caps and springs in this manner.
13. Close the incubator cover.
14. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
15. Touch the status console to gain access to the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
16. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules.
RELEV ERR
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ER01A
DOWN INITIALIZEUP
SHUTDOWN
MALFUNCTION
ACTION
ATTENTION
TRANSIENT
8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open
11:00:18 Code: 3S6 38 141
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar.
8/17/93 MALFUNCTIONSCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–61
Periodic Maintenance
Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps
Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps I
s
2–62 VITROS 250/350 C
f you notice scratches or excessive dirt (that you cannot remove), you hould replace all of the caps.
IMPORTANT: Be sure to replace the entire set. They are matched for reflectance. Do not replace single caps or mixed sets.
Position 24 contains the white reference slide. Be sure to return the reference slide to position 24 after you replace the caps. (If hardware Mod No. 9 is installed, there will be no cap in position 24.)
To replace the incubator evaporation caps:
1. Lift the top right cover.
2. Open the incubator cover.
Incubator Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps
3. Turn the incubator disk by hand until one of the incubator nest positions is lined up with the labeled slot marked by two raised bars or rails.
4. Push down on the partially-exposed spring that is exposed just below the top lip of the incubator disk. The spring will unlock and pop forward.
Incubator Disk
Align
Spring
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–63
Periodic Maintenance
Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps
2–64 VITROS 250/350 C
5. Remove the spring and the white plastic cap under it.
IMPORTANT: Note the alignment of the spring and cap to each other before removing them.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 until all caps and springs are removed.
7. Use an entire new set of caps, Part No. 999131.
8. Pick up a cap with the oval and round indentations facing down and the two small posts facing up.
9. Place the cap on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator.
Spring
Cap
Cap
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps
10. Put a spring on top of the cap with the notched area of the spring against the taller post and the shorter half of the spring resting over the shorter post. The longer portion of the spring with the small hole should now be on top.
11. Gently push the cap and spring into the incubator rotor until the upper portion of the spring snaps into place. Verify that the cap and spring are inserted correctly. The spring should lock in place, and the cap will have a slight spring-action when pulled forward.
12. Turn the incubator disk by hand until one of the slide positions is lined up with the two raised bars. Replace the other caps and springs in this manner.
13. Close the incubator cover.
14. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
15. Touch the status console to gain access to the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
Cap
Spring
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–65
Periodic Maintenance
Replacing the Incubator Evaporation Caps
2–66 VITROS 250/350 C
16. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules.
RELEV ERR
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ER01A
DOWN INITIALIZEUP
SHUTDOWN
MALFUNCTION
ACTION
ATTENTION
TRANSIENT
8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open
11:00:18 Code: 3S6 38 141
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar.
8/17/93 MALFUNCTIONSCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Proboscis
Cleaning the Proboscis C
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
leaning Materials Needed:
• One 10-cc syringe
• Hot distilled or deionized water
• A beaker or other container to catch fluid
• Compressed air
• A gauze pad
• 70% Isopropyl Alcohol (or deionized water)
To clean the proboscis:
1. Lift the top left cover.
2. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–67
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Proboscis
2–68 VITROS 250/350 C
3. Touch MEDS.
4. Touch SAMPLE METERING.
DIAGNOSTICS
May 19 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
MD00A
HELPRETURN
SUBSYSTEM TESTS
MEDS
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS
SETUP/ ADJUST
HARDWARE AND CHEM
INFO
PERFORM-ANCE
TESTS
COMPLEX TESTS
LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER
REMOTE ENABLED
MEDS – Main Menu
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME00A
HELPRETURN
SLIDESUPPLY 1
SAMPLEHANDLER
RM/IRMETERING
SAMPLEMETERING
REFLECTO-METER
SLIDE SUPPLY 2 INCUBATOR
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Proboscis
5. Touch TRUCK/PROBOSCIS.
6. Touch RESET SAMPLE METERING to reset the sample metering truck, proboscis, and pump to their home positions.
MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering
Feb 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME04A
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETE
LAB COMP :
RETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
TRUCK / PROBOSCIS
PUMP / SAMPLE
FLUID DROP
REMOTE ENABLED
MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering – Truck/Proboscis
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME04B
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETELAB COMP :
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
SAMPLE MIX CUPRIGHT
CM / RTMETERING HOME METERING
PAUSETIP
SEAL
SAHAREFERENCEPOSITION
DILUENTTRAY /
TIP EJECT
CYCLETRUCK DILUENT METERING CYCLE
PROBOSCIS
TIPPICK-UP
TIPSEAL
RESET TRUCK
SAMPLECUP
BOTTOM
TIPPICK-UP
RESETPROBOSCIS
MIX CUPLEFT
PMMETERING
MIXINGCUP
BOTTOM
TIPEJECT
| - - - - - - - - - - -- - - Truck - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | | - - - - - - - - - - - Proboscis - - - - - - -- - - - - - -|
RESETSAMPLE
METERING
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–69
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Proboscis
2–70 VITROS 250/350 C
7. Touch SAMPLE to move the sample metering truck to the left side of the analyzer.
8. Disconnect the tubing at the sample metering pump.
9. Inspect the sample metering tubing for moisture or serum and for cuts, cracks, or discoloration. Replace the tubing if it is defective.
Sampling Area
Proboscis
Metering PumpTubing
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the Proboscis
10. Put the beaker under the proboscis tip to collect the hot distilled or deionized water used in the next steps.
11. Fill the syringe with hot distilled or deionized water and attach it to the free end of the tubing.
12. Flush the proboscis with the distilled or deionized water. You may need to flush it several times until the water collected in the beaker is free of particles.
13. Attach a dry syringe to the sample metering tubing. Do not use canned air with chemical propellants or building air that contains oil.
14. Place a gauze pad treated with 70% isopropyl alcohol under the proboscis to trap any generated aerosols. If alcohol is not available, moisten the gauze with deionized water.
15. Discharge enough air to thoroughly dry the inside of the proboscis.
NOTE: It is very important that the proboscis is dried completely. Performance may be affected if any moisture remains in the proboscis.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–71
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the PSID Scanner Window
2–72 VITRO
16. Replace the used sample metering tubing with a 6.5 inch length of new tubing. Do not reuse the old tubing. To replace the sample metering tubing, follow steps 2 through 4 of the procedure “Replacing the Sample Metering Tubing” in Chapter 2 of this manual.
17. Close the top cover.
18. Touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU.
19. Touch RETURN to return to the Main Menu. Exiting Diagnostics will initialize the analyzer and reset the modules.
Cleaning the PSID Scanner Window
NOTE: The Positive Sample Identification (PSID) Scanner is an optional accessory.You may need to clean the PSID window if a spill occurs during sample handling or when directed to do so by your Customer Support Representative.
To clean the window:
1. Lift the top left cover of the analyzer.
WARNING for MODEL DS40 SCANNER USERSAvoid directly and continually exposing your eyes to the laser beam of the Model DS40 scanner, or a
reflection of the laser beam.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Periodic Maintenance
Cleaning the PSID Scanner Window
2. Wipe the window with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. It is acceptable to use 70 percent isopropyl alcohol to clean the lens, if followed by deionized water. The lint-free cloth should be damp, not dripping. Allow the window to air dry.
Model DS40 scanner
Model 3700 Scanner
CAUTION: Do not use solvents, ammonia, glass cleaners, or cleaning agents containing abrasives to clean the PSID window. These items will damage the window and affect PSID performance.
3. Close the left cover of the analyzer.
Window on PSID Scanner
Window on PSID Scanner
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 2–73
Periodic Maintenance
Decontaminating the Analyzer
Decontaminating the Analyzer A
i
2–74 VITROS 250/350 C
ssume that all used equipment is contaminated with potentially nfectious biological material. Use the “Universal Precautions” recommended by OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) Bloodborne Pathogen Standard 29CFR1910.1030 when handling or cleaning equipment. In particular:
• Wear gloves, closed shoes, buttoned lab coats, and safety glasses throughout the cleaning and maintenance process.
• Treat all waste materials used in the cleaning process as contaminated. Follow the site procedures for your laboratory to dispose of these materials.
• Handle all equipment with care. Mechanical parts may have edges, pinch points, and corners that could potentially cause injury.
Cleaning the Analyzer
1. Empty the disposal boxes and any slides, cups, tips, or fluids.2. Clean all obvious materials from the outside surfaces of the analyzer with a cloth that is moistened with soapy water. Avoid excessive use of water. Rinse with water to remove soap residue.
3. Clean the control unit, monitor screen, and the keypad cover with distilled water.
4. Clean potentially contaminated areas of the analyzer with a 70 percent isopropyl alcohol in water solution.
NOTES: Be sure to use 70 percent alcohol and not more concentrated solutions. It is critical that enough water be present to hydrolyze and thus break down (denature) proteins.
Ten percent bleach is not recommended for general cleaning as it can be corrosive to metal parts.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
D /350 Chemistry System
Part Number 994142UC-ENRe 2005-01-03 (Supersedes 10/01)
M
D*Mot 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
V
E
E
E
Inh
Lo
Lo
Canp
Indi
C
Ctipp
Cd(e
C
In
C
C
Lo
V
V
O
aily Maintenance Log VITROS 250
viewed by __________________________________________ Date _____________________
onth/Year Analyzer J Number Analyzer Serial Number
aily* - Check (✔) Boxesaintenance every 24 hours unless
herwise specified.
Day
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
erify slide inventory/load cartridges
mpty mixing cup array / tip disposal box
mpty slide disposal box
mpty cartridge disposal box
spect sample trays; tube, cup, and eight adaptors
ad mixing cup arrays
ad sample tips
hange Reference Fluid micro tip d clean Reference Fluid
roboscis (every 8 hours)
stall new Reference Fluid sposable reservoir (white label)
lean Reference Fluid cover/seal
hange Immuno-Wash Fluid micro and clean Immuno-Wash Fluid
roboscis (every 8 hours)
hange Immuno-Wash Fluid isposable reservoir (yellow label) very 72 hours)
lean Immuno-Wash Fluid cover/seal
spect diluent tray and bottles
heck diluent levels and replace if required
lean diluent caps
ad diluent tray on analyzer
erify correct date/time on screen
erify that daily QC has been run
perator’s Initials
We 50 Chemistry System
Revi
Mon
Wee Date Initial
Clea
Clea
Clea cis
Clea ps
Clea
Clea
Insp
Bac
s
Ope
-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.digo Creek Drive
ester, New York 14626-5101
OS is a trademark of -Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.
.S.A. Part Number 994142UC-EN2005-01-03 (Supersedes 10/01)
ekly and As-Required Maintenance Log VITROS 250/3
ewed by __________________________________________ Date _____________________
th/Year Analyzer J Number Analyzer Serial Number
kly—Date/Initial Boxes Week 1 Week 2 Week 3 Week 4 Week 5 As Required
n tray platform and transport arm Replace salt pads in slide supply 1
n cup retainer Replace desiccant packs in slide supply 2
n diluent bottles Replace tubing on sample metering probos
n tip locator assembly Replace or clean incubator evaporation ca
n control unit screen Replace reference fluid seal
n keypad cover Replace Immuno-Wash Fluid seal
ect, clean, and/or replace air filter Replace diluent caps
k up QC/Config/Calibration Data Clean slide discard chutes
Clean analyzer cabinetry
Clean incubator evaporation caps and slot
Clean sample metering proboscis
Clean dispense blade/slide path
Replace reflectometer lamp
Adjust reflectometer iris
Perform Rate/CM Correction Factors test
Archive patient results
rator’s Initials
Ortho100 InRoch
VITROrtho
Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.,. Printed in U
3 Diagnostics
Using the Diagnostics Function
Version 2.0 VITRO
Using the diagnostics screen, you can access several of the diagnostics features provided with the VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System. These features may be helpful should you encounter any difficulties in daily operation of the equipment.
To access the diagnostics screen, touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
The features available on this screen are:
• MEDS. Lets you exercise the mechanical parts of the analyzer. You can also use MEDS for multiple moves within or across subsystems.
• SUBSYSTEM TESTS. Lets your Field Engineer run electromechanical diagnostics.
• LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER. Displays all characters transmitted to and from the laboratory computer. This feature is useful in troubleshooting the laboratory computer interface.
DIAGNOSTICS
May 19 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
MD00A
HELPRETURN
SUBSYSTEM TESTS
MEDS
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS
SETUP/ ADJUST
HARDWARE AND CHEM
INFO
PERFORM-ANCE
TESTS
COMPLEX TESTS
LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER
REMOTE ENABLED
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–1
Diagnostics
Using the Diagnostics Function
3–2 VITRO
• SETUP/ADJUST. Lets you perform the Rate/CM correction factor test (white/black correction factors), adjust the reflectometer iris, and display current setup values.
This feature also lets your Field Engineer set up and adjust sample metering, read sync, and slide transport.
• STANDALONE DIAGNOSTICS TESTS. Lets you perform the loopback test that verifies the operation of any of the three output device ports for either printer or for the lab computer interface.
All other stand-alone diagnostics are for Field Engineer use only. They allow the Field Engineer to determine the status of various subsystems outside the control software.
• COMPLEX TESTS. Lets the Field Engineer perform electromechanical simulations.
• PERFORMANCE TESTS. Lets you perform tests and generate statistics on selected analyzer components.
• HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO. Provides error history, datalogger analysis, and software identification.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS)
Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS) U
m
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
sing Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS), you can perform basic ovements of the analyzer one at a time. This can help you diagnose
any problems that may exist in the analyzer.
To access the MEDS screen:
1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
2. Touch MEDS on the main Diagnostics screen.
3. Touch the target for the mechanism you want to exercise. Additional targets will appear for each selection.
4. Touch RETURN to exit MEDS.
The following pages show the MEDS submenus and suggested movement sequences.
IMPORTANT: Each screen that appears has a RESET target at the bottom. Touch the RESET target before returning to the MEDS Main Menu after you have finished exercising a mechanism. For example, after exercising sample metering, touch the RESET SAMPLE METERING target before you return to the MEDS Main Menu.
MEDS – Main Menu
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME00A
HELPRETURN
SLIDESUPPLY 1
SAMPLEHANDLER
RM/IRMETERING
SAMPLEMETERING
REFLECTO-METER
SLIDE SUPPLY 2 INCUBATOR
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–3
Diagnostics
MEDS Sample Handler
MEDS Sample Handler
3–4 VITRO
The targets in the columns “Mixing Cup” and “Diluent Supply” will not appear if dilution is disabled. To enable or disable dilution, touch these targets in the following order:
1. OPTIONS
2. SYSTEM SERVICES
3. SUBSYSTEM CONTROL
4. SLIDE PROCESSING
5. ON or OFF to enable or disable dilution.
To exercise the sample handler:
• Touch RESET SAMPLE HANDLING before and after exercising any of the sample handler mechanisms.
• To exercise any of the mechanisms, follow the sequences listed below. Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost.
• Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Handler
Feb 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME01A
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETE
LAB COMP :
RETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
CYCLE TRAY
POSITIONS
TRAY TO SAMPLE SUPPLY
MOVE TRAY TO PICKUP
CYCLE CUP
ARRAY
MOVE TRAY TO
POSITION
CYCLE DILUENT
TRAY
CYCLE TRAY HOOK
RESETMOVE TRAY BACK
MOVE TO METERING
CYCLE CONTAINER
CAPRESET
CYCLE SOLENOID
CYCLE TRAY
MOVE BACKWARD 1
POSITION
MOVE TRAY TO
HOME
MOVE TRAY N TO
METERING
RESET TRAY
RESET ARRAY
UNLOAD DILUENT
TRAY
| - - - - - - Tray Transport - - - - - | Tip Supply Mixing Cup | - - - - - Diluent Supply- - - - - -|
RESET SAMPLE
HANDLING
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
MEDS Sample Handler Movement Sequences
MEDS Sample Handler Movement Sequences T
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
ray TransportMake sure a tray is present, then touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING
2. CYCLE TRAY POSITION
3. CYCLE TRAY HOOK
4. CYCLE SOLENOID
5. MOVE TRAY N TO METERING
6. TRAY TO SAMPLE SUPPLY
7. RESET
8. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING
Tip SupplyMake sure the tip tray is present, then touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING
2. MOVE TRAY TO PICKUP
3. MOVE TRAY BACK
4. CYCLE TRAY
5. RESET TRAY
6. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING
Mixing Cup ArrayMake sure a mixing cup array is present, then touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING
2. CYCLE CUP ARRAY
3. MOVE TO METERING
4. MOVE BACKWARD 1 POSITION
5. RESET ARRAY
6. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–5
Diagnostics
MEDS Sample Handler Movement Sequences
3–6 VITROS 250/350 C
Diluent SupplyMake sure a diluent tray is present, then touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING
2. MOVE TRAY TO POSITION
3. CYCLE CONTAINER CUP
4. MOVE TRAY TO HOME
5. UNLOAD DILUENT TRAY
6. RESET
7. CYCLE DILUENT TRAY
8. RESET
9. RESET SAMPLE HANDLING
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2
MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
• Touch RESET SLIDE SUPPLY before and after exercising any of the slide supply mechanisms.
• To exercise the slide supply mechanisms, follow the sequence listed below. The same sequence can be used for both slide supplies.
• Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 1
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ME02A
LOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
UNLOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
CYCLELOAD
DOOR
CYCLEUNLOAD
DOOR
RELEASECARTRIDGE
NEST N TOLOAD
NEST N TODISPENSE
NEST N TOVIEWPORT
CYCLECW
CYCLECCW
CYCLEPLUNGER
CHECKSLIDECOUNT
DISPENSESLIDE
DISPENSEBLADE
OUTER RING
DISPENSE BLADE
INNER RING
HOMEDISPENSE.
BLADE
DISPENSEBLADEPARK
DISPENSEBLADE CM
DISPENSEBLADE PMINC DEPTH
CYCLEDISPENSE
BLADE
PLUNGER
UP | DOWN
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RESETSLIDE
SUPPLY
Feb 22 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
DISPENSEBLADE
METERING
INC DEPTH
MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 2
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ME02A
LOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
UNLOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
CYCLELOAD
DOOR
CYCLEUNLOAD
DOOR
RELEASECARTRIDGE
NEST N TOLOAD
NEST N TODISPENSE
NEST N TOVIEWPORT
CYCLECW
CYCLECCW
CYCLEPLUNGER
CHECKSLIDECOUNT
DISPENSESLIDE
DISPENSEBLADE
OUTER RING
DISPENSE BLADE
INNER RING
HOMEDISPENSE.
BLADE
DISPENSEBLADEPARK
DISPENSEBLADE CM
DISPENSEBLADE PMINC DEPTH
CYCLEDISPENSE
BLADE
PLUNGER
UP | DOWN
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RESETSLIDE
SUPPLY
Feb 22 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
DISPENSEBLADE
METERING
INC DEPTH
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–7
Diagnostics
MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2 Movement Sequences
MEDS Slide Supplies 1 and 2 Movement Sequences
3–8 VITROS 250/350 C
Make sure that a cartridge is loaded in the nest position that you want to test, then touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SLIDE SUPPLY
2. NEST N TO VIEWPORT
3. NEST N TO DISPENSE
4. DISPENSE BLADE TO OUTER RING
5. PLUNGER UP
6. DISPENSE SLIDE
7. DISPENSE BLADE METERING
8. HOME DISPENSE BLADE
9. RESET SLIDE SUPPLY
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
MEDS Sample Metering
MEDS Sample Metering
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
• Touch TRUCK/PROBOSCIS to display the Truck/Proboscis screen.
• Touch PUMP/SAMPLE FLUID DROP to display the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen.
• Touch RETURN to return to the Main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering
Feb 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME04A
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETE
LAB COMP :
RETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
TRUCK / PROBOSCIS
PUMP / SAMPLE
FLUID DROP
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–9
Diagnostics
MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Truck/Proboscis
MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Truck/Proboscis
3–10 VITROS 250/350 C
• Touch RESET SAMPLE METERING before and after exercising any of the sample metering mechanisms.
• To exercise the sample metering mechanisms, follow the sequences listed below. The truck, proboscis, and pump must be moved in a specific sequence, or you will receive an error message and the movement will not occur. Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost.
• Touch RETURN to return to the main Sample Metering screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering – Truck/Proboscis
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME04B
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETELAB COMP :
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
SAMPLE MIX CUPRIGHT
CM / RTMETERING HOME METERING
PAUSETIP
SEAL
SAHAREFERENCEPOSITION
DILUENTTRAY /
TIP EJECT
CYCLETRUCK DILUENT METERING CYCLE
PROBOSCIS
TIPPICK-UP
TIPSEAL
RESET TRUCK
SAMPLECUP
BOTTOM
TIPPICK-UP
RESETPROBOSCIS
MIX CUPLEFT
PMMETERING
MIXINGCUP
BOTTOM
TIPEJECT
| - - - - - - - - - - -- - - Truck - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | | - - - - - - - - - - - Proboscis - - - - - - -- - - - - - -|
RESETSAMPLE
METERING
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Truck/
Truck Movement Sequence• If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch TRUCK/
PROBOSCIS to get to the Truck/Proboscis screen.
Touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE METERING
2. SAHA REFERENCE
3. DILUENT TRAY/TIP EJECT
4. TIP PICKUP
5. SAMPLE
6. MIX CUP LEFT
7. MIX CUP RIGHT
8. PM METERING
9. CM/RT METERING
10. TIP SEAL
11. RESET TRUCK
12. CYCLE TRUCK
13. RESET SAMPLE METERING
Proboscis Movement Sequence• If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch TRUCK/
PROBOSCIS to get to the Truck/Proboscis screen.
Pull the tip tray out of the sample metering path, then touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE METERING
2. HOME
3. DILUENT TRAY/TIP EJECT
4. DILUENT
5. RESET SAMPLE METERING
6. SAMPLE
7. SAMPLE CUP BOTTOM
8. RESET SAMPLE METERING
9. PM METERING
10. METERING PAUSE
11. METERING
12. RESET SAMPLE METERING
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–11
Diagnostics
MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/Sample Fluid Drop
MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/Sample Fluid Drop
3–12 VITROS 250/350 C
• Touch RESET SAMPLE METERING before and after exercising any of the sample metering mechanisms.
• To exercise the sample metering mechanisms, follow the sequences listed below. The truck, proboscis, and pump must be moved in a specific sequence, or you will receive an error message and the movement will not occur. Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost.
• Touch RETURN to return to the main Sample Metering screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering – Pump / Sample Fluid Drop
Feb 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME04C
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETELAB COMP :
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
ASPIRATE RESETPUMP
WETNESSSENSINGON | OFF
PICKUPTIP
CYCLESAMPLE
METERING
METERPRESSURESENSINGON | OFF
ASPIRATEDROP
CYCLEPUMP
HALF STEP
WETNESSEMITTERON | OFF
METERSAMPLE
DROP
CYCLEPUMP
FULL STEP
EJECTTIP
| - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pump - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
RESETSAMPLE
METERING
| - - - Sample Fluid Drop - - -|
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/
Pump Movement Sequence• If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch PUMP/
SAMPLE FLUID DROP to get to the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen.
Touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE METERING
2. ASPIRATE
3. METER
4. CYCLE PUMP HALF STEP
5. CYCLE PUMP FULL STEP
6. RESET SAMPLE METERING
Sample Fluid Drop Sequence• If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch PUMP/
SAMPLE FLUID DROP to get to the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen.
IMPORTANT:
1. Make sure the tip tray is in the metering path with tips in the tray.
2. Make sure a sample container is in place with fluid in it (use the target MOVE TRAY N TO METERING on the Sample Handler screen).
3. Make sure that a slide is in place before you meter (use steps 1-8 of the exercise procedure under Slide Supplies 1 & 2 to move a slide to the metering position).
Touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE METERING
2. PICKUP TIP
3. ASPIRATE DROP
4. METER SAMPLE DROP
5. EJECT TIP
6. CYCLE SAMPLE METERING
7. RESET SAMPLE METERING
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–13
Diagnostics
MEDS Reference and Immuno-Rate (IR) Metering
MEDS Reference and Immuno-Rate (IR) Metering
3–14 VITRO
The targets under the heading “Reference Metering” will not appear if reference metering is disabled. The targets under the heading “IR” will not appear if immuno-rate metering is disabled. To enable or disable reference or immuno-rate metering, touch these targets in the following order:
1. OPTIONS
2. SYSTEM SERVICES
3. SUBSYSTEM CONTROL
4. SLIDE PROCESSING
5. ON or OFF to enable or disable reference or immuno-rate metering.
To exercise reference or immuno-rate metering:
• Touch RESET REFERENCE METERING before selecting any other Reference Metering target.
• Touch RESET IR before selecting any other IR target.
• Touch RESET PUMP if the pump is lost.
• Always touch ASPIRATE FLUID before touching METER FLUID for both reference metering and IR metering.
• Touch any other target to exercise the selected mechanism.
• Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
MEDS – Main Menu – RM / IR Metering
FEB 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME05A
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETELAB COMP :
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
MAIN-TENANCE
CYCLEARM
CYCLERM
MAIN-TENANCE
CYCLEARM
CYCLEIR
PRE-DISPENSE
CYCLEPUMP
RESETPUMP
DISPENSE
CYCLEPUMP
RESETPUMP
DISPENSE ASPIRATEFLUID
RESERVOIR
ASPIRATEFLUID
RESERVOIR METERFLUID
METERFLUID
|- - - - - - - - - Reference Metering - - - - - - - - - - - | |- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - IR - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
RESETREFERENCEMETERING
RESET IR
PRE-DISPENSE
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer
MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer
Version 2.0 VITRO
The targets under the heading “Electrometer” will not appear if reference metering is disabled. To enable or disable reference metering, touch these targets in the following order:
1. OPTIONS
2. SYSTEM SERVICES
3. SUBSYSTEM CONTROL
4. SLIDE PROCESSING
5. ON or OFF to enable or disable reference metering.
To exercise the incubator, transverse shuttle, and electrometer:
• Touch RESET INCUBATOR before selecting an Incubator MEDS operation.
• Touch a target to exercise a mechanism.
• Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost.
• Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
MEDS – Main Menu – Incubator / Transverse Shuttle / Electromet
Feb 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME06A
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETELAB COMP :
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
HOME EXTEND EXTEND IRMETERING RESET CYCLE
CYCLE RETRACT RETRACT DUMP RESET
PURGE CYCLE CYCLE SAMPLEMETERING
RESET CYCLERESET
| - Incubator - - CM / RT Eject - - PM Eject - - - - Transverse Shuttle - - - Electrometer
RESETINCUBATOR
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–15
Diagnostics
MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer Movement Sequences
MEDS Incubator, Transverse Shuttle, and Electrometer Movement Sequences
3–16 VITROS 250/350 C
Incubator, CM/RT Eject, and PM Eject Movement SequenceTouch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET INCUBATOR
2. HOME
3. CYCLE
4. PURGE
5. (CM/RT Eject) EXTEND
6. (CM/RT Eject) RETRACT
7. (CM/RT Eject) CYCLE
8. (CM/RT Eject) RESET
9. (PM Eject) EXTEND
10. (PM Eject) RETRACT
11. (PM Eject) CYCLE
12. (PM Eject) RESET
13. RESET INCUBATOR
Transverse Shuttle Movement SequenceTouch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET INCUBATOR
2. IR METERING
3. DUMP
4. SAMPLE METERING
5. CYCLE
6. RESET
7. RESET INCUBATOR
Electrometer Movement SequenceTouch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET INCUBATOR
2. CYCLE
3. RESET
4. RESET INCUBATOR
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
MEDS Reflectometer
MEDS Reflectometer
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
• Touch RESET REFLECTOMETER before selecting the first Reflectometer target.
• Touch SELECT WAVELENGTH to choose a wavelength to exercise.
• Touch any other target to exercise the selected mechanism.
• Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
MEDS – Main Menu – Reflectometer
Feb 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME07A
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETELAB COMP :
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
SELECTWAVELENGTH
CLOSE SHUTTER
CYCLEFILTERWHEEL
CYCLESHUTTER
RESETFILTERWHEEL
RESETSHUTTER
OPENSHUTTER
RESETREFLECT-OMETER
MEDS – Main Menu – Reflectometer – Select Wavelength
Feb 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME07B
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETELAB COMP :
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
FILTER # 0340 NM(HOME)
FILTER # 4600 NM
FILTER # 1400 NM
FILTER # 5630 NM
FILTER # 2460 NM
FILTER # 6670 NM
FILTER # 3540 NM
FILTER # 7680 NM
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–17
Diagnostics
Subsystem Tests
Subsystem Tests TE
3–18 VITROS 250/350 C
he Subsystem Tests of Diagnostics are for Clinical Diagnostics Field ngineer use only. Do not attempt to use these tests.
Lab Comp Protocol Analyzer C
f
all your Customer Support Representative for assistance in using thiseature.
Setup/Adjust Tr
he Setup/Adjust feature within Diagnostics allows you to move and ecord the number of steps for a mechanism to go to a specifiedlocation. If the placement is satisfactory, the number of steps will be saved and used by the analyzer.
IMPORTANT: You should change the setups only with great care and with a thorough understanding of the desired results.
To access the Setup/Adjust screen and begin using the Setup/Adjust feature:
1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
2. Touch SETUP/ADJUST on the main Diagnostics screen.
IMPORTANT: Only trained Field Engineers should use the SAMPLE METERING, READ SYNC, and SLIDE TRANSPORT fea-tures.
DIAGNOSTICS - Setup/Adjustments
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
SA00A
LECTUREREAD
SAMPLE
RATE/CM
SLIDE
CURRENT
REFLECT-
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
METERING TRANSPORT IRISOMETER
SYNCCORRECTION
FACTORSETUPVALUES
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
Version 2.0 VITRO
Perform the Rate/CM Correction Factors Test whenever you change the reflectometer lamp and encounter unacceptable quality control values on multiple tests, or when instructed to do so by your Customer Support Representative.
Ensure that the reflectometer iris is adjusted properly before performing the Rate/CM Correction Factors test. If you don’t know how to adjust the reflectometer iris, see the instructions in the next section, “Reflectometer Iris Adjustment.”
To perform this procedure you will need:
• VITROS White Reference Slides (Part Number 994723)
• VITROS Black Reference Slides (Part Number 994724)
NOTE: White Reference Slides are also referred to as White Correction Factor (WCF) Slides.Black Reference Slides are also referred to as Black Correction Factor (BCF) Slides.
To access the Rate/CM Correction Factors test screen and begin using the Rate/CM Correction Factors test feature:
1. Touch RATE/CM CORRECTION FACTOR on the Setup/Adjustments screen.
The next screen will read: “Warning: Adjustments made to the mechanism may result in significant changes in analyzer performance. All adjustments should be made by qualified personnel only. If adjustments are made, all changes should be saved on a backup diskette.”
— If you don’t know how to backup information to a diskette, see Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Operator’s Manual.
2. Touch CONTINUE to proceed with the Rate/CM Correction Factors test.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–19
Diagnostics
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
3–20 VITRO
3. Wait while the incubator and slide transport mechanisms initialize.
The screen will display the wavelengths and white slide assay values. The prompt line will ask if you want to use the current assay numbers.
DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Rate/CM Correction Factors
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Use current assay numbers? (Y/N):
SA20B
Wavelength White Slide Assay
340 nm 0.44020400 nm 0.76700460 nm 0.82310540 nm 0.83690600 nm 0.83770630 nm 0.83800670 nm 0.84120680 nm 0.84140
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
4. Compare the displayed assay values to the assay values on the carton of White Reference Slides.
— If the correct values are not on the screen, type “N” for no. Then type the correct assay value from the carton, and press the Enter key on the keyboard for each of the wavelengths displayed.
— If the values are correct, type “Y” for yes and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
The screen will display the wavelengths, assays, and current white correction factors.
DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Rate/CM Correction Factors
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
1) Empty used slide bin and put in a clean catch cloth.2) Lift incubator cover and put White slide on labelled slot.3) Insert White Correction Factor Slide completely into incubator.4) Lower incubator cover and touch START.
SA20C
Wavelength White Slide Assay Current WCF
340 nm 0.44020 0.38012400 nm 0.76700 0.72690460 nm 0.82310 0.81089540 nm 0.83690 0.82392600 nm 0.83770 0.81384630 nm 0.83800 0.81181670 nm 0.84120 0.81211680 nm 0.84140 0.81185
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPSTART
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–21
Diagnostics
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
3–22 VITRO
5. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
6. Open the incubator cover.
Incubator Cover
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
7. Place a White Reference Slide on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator. Position the slide with the ribbed side down, notch toward the incubator.
8. Push the slide into the incubator so that the incubator cap closes.
9. Close the incubator cover and touch START. The analyzer will reposition the slide.
10. The analyzer will now display the wavelengths and black slide assay values. The prompt line will ask if you want to use the current assay numbers. Compare the displayed black assay values to the assay values on the carton of Black Reference Slides.
— If the values on the screen are not the same as the values on the carton, type “N” for no. Then type the correct assay values from the carton for each of the wavelengths displayed.
— If all the values are correct, type “Y” for yes and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
11. The screen will display the wavelength, assays, and current black correction factors.
12. Place a Black Reference Slide on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator. Position the slide with the rib side down, and line up the notch in the slide with the label in front of the incubator slot.
Slide
Incubator
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–23
Diagnostics
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
3–24 VITRO
13. Push the slide into the incubator so that the incubator cap closes.
14. Close the incubator cover and touch START.
— The analyzer will reposition the slide.
— The test takes approximately twelve minutes to complete 92 read cycles. The screen displays and updates the number of cycles completed until it reaches approximately 84 read cycles. The screen will then go blank because of the screen-saver feature of the analyzer. Touch the screen or press any key on the keyboard to reactivate the screen.
— The analyzer will discard the used white and black reference slides automatically. Do not reuse these slides.
— The new correction factors are displayed on the summary screen when the test is finished.
DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Rate/CM Correction Factors
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
SA20C
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Wavelength New WCF White Dr S.D. New BCF Black Dr S.D.
340 nm ** 0.38175 ** 0.00055 *** 0.00097 ** 0.00081400 nm 0.84258 ** 0.00026 *** 0.00042 ** 0.00100460 nm 0.90888 0.00007 *** 0.00015 ** 0.00120540 nm 0.94045 0.00008 *** 0.00074 ** 0.00115600 nm 0.95488 0.00004 *** 0.00081 ** 0.00170630 nm 0.95760 0.00008 *** 0.00071 ** 0.00101670 nm 0.95473 0.00011 *** 0.00097 ** 0.00076680 nm 0.95769 0.00008 *** 0.00078 ** 0.00129
Summary
DISPLAYBLACKDATA
DISPLAYWHITEDATA
> Automatic Update? (Y/N):
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
15. Display and print both the white correction factor data and the black correction factor data.
• Touch DISPLAY WHITE DATA. The White Correction Factors screen appears.
• Print the screen for your laboratory’s quality control records by pressing the PrtScr key.
• Touch DISPLAY BLACK DATA.
• Print the screen for your laboratory’s quality control records by pressing the PrtScr key.
DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Rate/CM Correction Factors
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
SA20C
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Wavelength White Assay Current WCF New WCF Dr S.D.
340 nm 0.35680 0.42808 ** 0.38175 ** 0.00055400 nm 0.74230 0.86311 0.84258 ** 0.00026460 nm 0.81610 0.91215 0.90888 0.00007540 nm 0.83770 0.93112 0.94045 0.00008600 nm 0.83940 0.94345 0.95488 0.00004630 nm 0.83960 0.94681 0.95760 0.00008670 nm 0.83630 0.95046 0.95473 0.00011680 nm 0.83770 0.95221 0.95769 0.00008
White Correction Factors
DISPLAYBLACKDATA
DISPLAYWHITEDATA
> Touch DISPLAY BLACK DATA to display more data.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–25
Diagnostics
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
3–26 VITRO
16. Touch RETURN to return to the Summary screen.
— The Summary screen may show two or three flashing asterisks before some correction factors or standard deviations (S.D.s). The table below explains what the asterisks mean.
Number of Asterisks
Condition
None • New correction factor (WCF or BCF) is within 5% of original value.
**
• New correction factor (WCF or BCF) is within 5% to 15% of the original value.
OR
• New White or Black Dr S.D. is more than .0002 from the original value.
***• New correction factor (WCF or BCF) is more
than 15% of the original value.
DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Rate/CM Correction Factors
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
SA20C
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Wavelength New WCF White Dr S.D. New BCF Black Dr S.D.
340 nm ** 0.38175 ** 0.00055 *** 0.00097 ** 0.00081400 nm 0.84258 ** 0.00026 *** 0.00042 ** 0.00100460 nm 0.90888 0.00007 *** 0.00015 ** 0.00120540 nm 0.94045 0.00008 *** 0.00074 ** 0.00115600 nm 0.95488 0.00004 *** 0.00081 ** 0.00170630 nm 0.95760 0.00008 *** 0.00071 ** 0.00101670 nm 0.95473 0.00011 *** 0.00097 ** 0.00076680 nm 0.95769 0.00008 *** 0.00078 ** 0.00129
Summary
DISPLAYBLACKDATA
DISPLAYWHITEDATA
> Automatic Update? (Y/N):
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
17. Follow the instructions below to determine when to update correction factors.
If Summary Screen Shows: Update?
• Two asterisks (**) or no asterisks in the New WCF or White Dr S.D. columns (no values with three asterisks)
AND
• New BCF values are all within typical range1
Yes.
Continue with step 18 on the next page.
• Two asterisks (**) or no asterisks in the New WCF or White Dr S.D. columns (no values with three asterisks)
AND
• Any New BCF value is outside of typical range1
No.
Check for errors2 and repeat test.
Call your Customer Support Center if New BCF values are out of range after you repeat the test.
• Any New WCF or White Dr S.D. value with three asterisks (***)
AND
• New BCF values are either within or outside of typical range
Yes—if service was performed or you have a new lot of correction factor slides.3 Continue with step 18 on the next page.
Otherwise, check for errors2 and repeat test.
Call your Customer Support Center if any New WCF or White Dr S.D. values have three asterisks after you repeat the test.
1 It is common for three flashing asterisks to appear in front of New BCF values, regardless of how many times the correction factors test is repeated. Typically, BCF values should fall in the range [-0.0020 to 0.0020].
2 Check for the following errors and repeat the correction factors test.— Ensure that the reference slides were inserted correctly. Reference slides should be
inserted ribbed side down.— Ensure that the assay values from the White or Black Reference Slide cartons were
entered correctly.3 Three asterisks in front of New WCF values usually indicates that something has
changed in the analyzer’s optical system. This can happen if a service procedure has just been performed, such as the installation of a new internal reference or a new lamp. This can also happen if you have a new lot of correction factor slides. If there is a valid reason for a large change in the correction factors (three asterisks), you should update the correction factors.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–27
Diagnostics
Rate/CM Correction Factor Test
3–28 VITRO
18. The prompt line will ask if you want to update the correction factors automatically. If you update the correction factors, repeat the entire correction factors test again from step 1 to verify the new values.
— To update the correction factors automatically, type “Y” for yes and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The update takes about ten seconds.
— To end the test without updating the correction factors, type “N” for no and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
Warning: If you update the correction factors with inappropriate values, patient results may be affected. If this happens, you can manually re-enter previous correction factors from the printouts you made in step 15 using “WCF Manual Entry,” found in the Operator’s Manual.
19. Close the analyzer covers.
20. Touch RETURN to return to the Setup/Adjustments screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
21. The prompt line will ask you to confirm that you want to return to the Setup/Adjustments screen. Type “Y” for yes and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
22. The analyzer will initialize when you exit Diagnostics.
Run and evaluate quality control fluids to ensure all tests are performing correctly.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Reflectometer Iris Adjustment
Reflectometer Iris Adjustment
Version 2.0 VITRO
Perform the reflectometer iris adjustment procedure to adjust the lamp output after you have replaced the lamp.
To perform the reflectometer iris adjustment:
1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
2. Touch SETUP/ADJUST.
3. Touch REFLECTOMETER IRIS on the Setup/Adjustments screen.
DIAGNOSTICS
May 19 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
MD00A
HELPRETURN
SUBSYSTEM TESTS
MEDS
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS
SETUP/ ADJUST
HARDWARE AND CHEM
INFO
PERFORM-ANCE
TESTS
COMPLEX TESTS
LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER
REMOTE ENABLED
DIAGNOSTICS - Setup/Adjustments
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
SA00A
LECTUREREAD
SAMPLE
RATE/CM
SLIDE
CURRENT
REFLECT-
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
METERING TRANSPORT IRISOMETER
SYNCCORRECTION
FACTORSETUPVALUES
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–29
Diagnostics
Reflectometer Iris Adjustment
3–30 VITRO
4. Touch START after you have waited for the lamp to stabilize.
5. When “Center the tool slide? (Y/N)” is displayed on the prompt line, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
IMPORTANT: Do not type “Y” at this prompt. Always type “N” to use the analyzer’s internal reference slide.
6. Touch START. The filter with the highest voltage reading will be displayed. Note and record which filter is displayed.
7. Once the voltage reading is displayed, touch START again.
8. Move the iris control switch to the right or left as required to set the voltage according to the table below. (Refer to illustrations 10 and 11 of the lamp replacement label located on the inside of the right front door as a guide.)
You will be adjusting the voltage of the filter displayed in step 6 above. All other filter voltages will be less than the displayed filter.
• Adjust the displayed filter to within the adjustment guidelines listed in Table 1.
DIAGNOSTICS - Setup/Adjustment - Reflectometer Iris
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
> Wait 30 minutes if a new lamp was installed.> Touch START to begin.
SA10A
WARNING: If a new lamp has been installed, the lampmust be allowed a 30 minute stabilizing period.Failure to wait the allotted time could result ininaccurate results due to unstable lamp conditions.
RETURNMAIN DIAG
MENUSTART
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
Table 1. Filter Adjustment Guidelines
Displayed filter wavelength Target voltage
Any filterAs high as possible, but not to exceed8.0 V
9. Touch DONE.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Reflectometer Iris Adjustment
10. The screen displays a summary of the current voltages for all of the wavelengths. Verify that all the filter voltages fall within the Filter Verification Limits listed in Table 2 below.
Table 2. Filter Verification Limits
Filter wavelength Voltage
All filters 3.5 to 9.0 V
If any of the filters are not within the range listed in Table 2, do the following:
• Repeat the adjustment from step 5.
• If you have just installed a new lamp, reseat the lamp (remove it, turn the prongs around, and reinsert it). Repeat the adjustment procedure starting at step 1.
• Install a new lamp following the procedure “Changing the Reflectometer Lamp” in this manual. Repeat the adjustment procedure starting at step 1 after the new lamp has stabilized for at least 30 minutes.
11. Close the right front door and top covers of the analyzer.
12. Touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU.
13. Touch RETURN to return to the Main Menu. The analyzer will initialize.
14. Note date and initials on the “As Required” section of your Maintenance Log.
15. Run and evaluate quality control (QC) fluids to ensure all tests are performing correctly.
If the QC results are not satisfactory, perform the Rate/CM Correction Factor test, and recalibrate. Refer to the “Rate/CM Correction Factor Test” in the “Setup/Adjust” section of Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” in this manual.
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–31
Diagnostics
Current Setup Values
Current Setup Values
3–32 VITRO
Select this feature to display the current setup values.
To display current setup values:
1. Touch CURRENT SETUP VALUES on the Setup/Adjustments screen.
2. Touch DISPLAY MORE DATA to display additional setup values.
3. Touch RETURN to return to the Setup/Adjustments screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
NOTE: You can print a copy of this screen by pressing the PrtScr Key.
DIAGNOSTICS – Setup/Adjustments – Current Setup Values
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
SA25A
TRUCK: Sample 46Tip Pick Up 24Mixing Cup Left 33Mixing Cup Right 24Diluent Tray 39RT/CM Slide 75PM Slide 33
PROBOSCIS: Mixing Cup Bottom 223Sample Cup Bottom 271Prob. Compression 56Tip Height 10
REFERENCE SLIDE CENTER 171READ SYNC: 4.0 ms
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
DISPLAYMOREDATA
SLIDE TRANSPORT: Disp to Metering 12Inc/Disp Path 26Inc RT/CM Depth 45Inc PM Depth 50PM Eject Depth 20Inc Steps/Rev 14412
SAMPLE TRANSPORT: Tray Fin Reference 310Carriage Meter Pos –75Mixing Cup Trans 33Diluent Tray Trans 17Tray Hook –95Psid Scan 0
INPUTSETUPVALUES
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Stand-Alone Diagnostic Tests
Stand-Alone Diagnostic Tests
Version 2.0 VITRO
The Stand-alone Diagnostic Tests screen displays when you touch STANDALONE DIAGNOSTICS TESTS on the Diagnostics screen.
The loopback test for serial devices is the only feature on this screen for routine operator use. All other features are for Field Engineer use only.
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
> Touch a TARGET.
SDSA1
RETURN
Standalone Diagnostics consist of the following tests:
1 – Touch Screen Tests (Calibration, Pixel Sensitivity, Emulation)2 – Keyboard Test (Echo of all keys, including function and control keys)3 – Serial Devices (AT4 and M&D Loopback, Printer and Lab Computer Config)4 – Sensor Tests (A/D Reads, Optical Sensors, Heat Pumps)5 – Motor Tests (Stepper Motors, Bidirectional DC Motors, Fans)6 – S/W Version ID Numbers (MIC ROM, Flash, Slave ROM, EEPROM, Analog, PAL)7 – REC Board Tests (Elec. & Reflec. loopbacks and control line toggles)
To initiate Standalones, touch "RETURN" twice to go back to the DiagnosticsMenu and then the Main Menu. When in the Main Menu, touch the target "Exit to Boot Menu," and "y" when prompted by "Do you want to continue? Y/N".The analyzer will then proceed to close any open files and reset the Scheduler Computer. When the Vitros Boot Menu appears, select the touch target "STANDALONE ELECTRONIC DIAG." to load and run Standalones.
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
W1.OT
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–33
Diagnostics
Loopback Tests
Loopback Tests Td
3–34 VITROS 250/350 C
he loopback test lets you verify the operation of any of the three output evice ports for either printer or the lab computer interface (LCI). This is
useful in determining the cause of a malfunction in printer or LCI operation by testing the basic functionality of the analyzer ports. If the test passes, it indicates the port is fine and you should check the port configuration in the Options dialogue and/or the cable or output device for a solution to the malfunction.
You will need to use the loopback connector TL-3225 (part of the spare parts kit).
To run loopback tests:
1. Touch EXIT TO BOOT MENU on the Main Menu.
2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard at the prompt, “This will exit to the Boot Menu. Do you wish to continue?” It will take a few minutes for the Boot Menu to display.
MAIN MENU
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
SCO3A
SAMPLE PROGRAMMING
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
CARTRIDGE HANDLING
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
QUALITY CONTROL
CALIBRATION PROGRAMMING
DIAGNOSTICS
REVIEW RESULTS
OPTIONS
EXIT TO BOOTMENU
HELPSHUTDOWN ANALYZER
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Loopback Tests
3. Touch STANDALONE ELECTRONIC DIAG.
4. Type the operator access code, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
5. Type “3” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to select Serial Devices.
VITROS Boot Menu
> Touch a target to select a function.
BT00A
COMPUTERSYSTEMCHECKS
CONFIGUREANALYZER
HELPSHUTDOWN ANALYZER
Program Selection
LOADNEW
SOFTWARE
DISKUTILITIES
ANALYZERSOFTWARE
STANDALONEELECTRONIC
DIAG.
EXIT TOOPERATING
SYSTEM
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC MAIN MENU V5.2
Touch "RETURN" to exit Standalonesor select and enter a number: 3
RETURN
1 – Touch Screen Tests2 – Keyboard Test 3 – Serial Devices4 – Sensor Tests5 – Version Number Test 6 – Motor Tests7 – REC Board Tests
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–35
Diagnostics
Loopback Tests
3–36 VITROS 250/350 C
6. Type “1” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to select Loopback Tests.
7. Type “1,” “2,” or “3,” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to select the port desired. (Selections “4” and “5” are for Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer use only.)
SERIAL DEVICE MAIN MENU
Touch "RETURN" to go back to the Standalones Main Menuor select and enter a number: 1
RETURN
1 – Loopback Tests2 – Printer 1 Configuration 3 – Printer 2 Configuration4 – Lab Computer Tests
LOOPBACK TEST MENU
Touch "RETURN" to go back to the Serial Device Main Menuor select and enter a number:
RETURN
1 – AT4 Board Printer Port 12 – AT4 Board Printer Port 23 – AT4 Board Lab Computer Port4 – AT4 Board Scheduler Computer Port5 – Scheduler Computer Output Ports (M&D and REC Board)
For more information on Loopback Tests, see the Diagnostic and Troubleshooting section of the Service Manual.
PG 01
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Loopback Tests
8. Disconnect the device cable from the selected port on the back of the analyzer.
9. Install the Loopback Connector TL-3225 (supplied in the spare parts kit) on the selected port connector.
10. Touch CONTINUE.
11. The number of tests completed successfully will be displayed on the screen. When you are satisfied the port is functioning properly, touch CONTINUE to stop the test.
12. Remove the loopback connector and reconnect the device cable.
13. Touch RETURN three times.
14. Touch ANALYZER SOFTWARE to start a reset if you want to exit Stand-Alone Diagnostics and return to control software.
1
2
3
BACK OF ANALYZER
Port Connectors
Device Cable
Loopback ConnectorTL-3225
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–37
Diagnostics
Complex Tests
Complex Tests TE
3–38 VITROS 250/350 C
he Complex Tests of Diagnostics are for Clinical Diagnostics Field ngineer use only. Do not attempt to use these tests.
Performance Tests Ts
he Performance Tests features within Diagnostics allow you to perform everal tests and generate statistics on selected analyzer components.To access the performance tests:
1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
2. Touch PERFORMANCE TESTS.
DIAGNOSTICS
May 19 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
MD00A
HELPRETURN
SUBSYSTEM TESTS
MEDS
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS
SETUP/ ADJUST
HARDWARE AND CHEM
INFO
PERFORM-ANCE
TESTS
COMPLEX TESTS
LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER
REMOTE ENABLED
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
MD00B
INCUBATOR
SAMPLEMETERING
REF MET&
IMM RATE
REFLECT-OMETER
CARTRIDGEHANDLING
ELECTRO-METER
READY
SAMPLING
PSIDSCANNER
HELPRETURN
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Sample Metering
Details on how to run each performance test are found on the following pages.
Sample Metering T
wo sample metering performance tests are available:• Leak/Hysteresis Test—Performs a sequence of four checks: A/D reference voltage check, transducer check, leak test, and hysteresis test.
— The A/D reference voltage check reads and displays the A/D converter output.
— The transducer check monitors and displays the pressure as voltage values while the sealed tip is subjected to a series of aspirations followed by a series of dispenses.
— The leak test verifies that a closed or sealed system can be created in the sample metering assembly when the proboscis picks up a tip, aspirates, and dispenses a sample.
— The hysteresis test measures the ability of the pump (over its full range) to return to its initial value after a set of dispense/aspirate actions. The pump is the portion of the sample metering assembly that causes the pressure changes. (Hysteresis is a physics term that indicates the ability or inability of a stressed system to return to its original state when the cause of stress is removed.)
The four checks are carried out in the order in which they are listed above. You can end the leak/hysteresis test after completing each check or continue with the next check in the sequence. If you choose to stop the leak/hysteresis test before all four checks have been completed, you must start the test from the beginning to perform the checks missed. For instance, you cannot go directly to the leak test without first doing the A/D reference voltage check and the transducer check.
• Drop Detection Test—Verifies that the sample metering drop detection and the slide recognition sensor are functioning properly. This sensor must tell the analyzer a drop of sample was dispensed on the slide and a slide is actually present in the slide block to accept a sample drop.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–39
Diagnostics
Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis
Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis
3–40 VITROS 250/350 C
To test sample metering leak/hysteresis:
1. Touch SAMPLE METERING on the Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch LEAK/HYSTERESIS.
3. The reference and resolution voltages are displayed on the screen. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.
SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT00A
LEAK/HYSTERESIS
DROPDETECTION
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Leak Test – A/D Ref. Voltage Check
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
> Compare Precision Reference Voltage, Resolution Voltage and Ambient > Pressure to current specifications.> Do you wish to continue with the Leak Test? (Y/N) :
PT04A
SH SM PM INOP
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
Reference Resolution4.941 Vdc 0.039 Vdc
Ambient Pressure = 2.480
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis
4. A prompt asks if you want to continue with the Leak Test.
— To discontinue, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The Sample Metering Performance Tests screen is displayed.
— To continue, type “Y“ and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the transducer check.
5. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.
6. A prompt asks if you want to continue with the leak test.
— To discontinue, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The Sample Metering Performance Tests screen is displayed.
— To continue, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the leak test.
SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Leak Test – Transducer Check
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
> Compare Ambient Pressure, Max Delta, Min Delta, and Mean Delta values to> current specifications.> Do you wish to continue with the Leak Check? (Y/N) :
PT01A
SH SM PM INOP
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
Aspirate Dispense
Maximum Delta = 0.742 Vdc Maximum Delta = 0.781 VdcMinimum Delta = 0.000 Vdc Minimum Delta = 0.000 VdcMean Delta = 0.215 Vdc Mean Delta = 0.254 Vdc
Ambient Pressure = 2.266 Vdc
DISPLAYDATA
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–41
Diagnostics
Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis
3–42 VITROS 250/350 C
7. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.
8. A prompt asks if you want to continue with the hysteresis test.
— To discontinue, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The main Sample Metering Performance Test screen is displayed.
— To continue, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the hysteresis test.
SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Leak Test – Voltage Differential
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
> Compare dispense and aspirate leak voltages to current specifications.> Do you wish to continue to Hysteresis Test? (Y/N) :
PT01B
SH SM PM INOP
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
Aspirate = 0.117 Vdc Dispense = 0.020 Vdc
Ambient Pressure = 2.480 Vdc
DISPLAYDATA
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing Sample Metering Leak/Hysteresis
9. Print the screen by pressing PrtScr key.
The sample metering leak/hysteresis tests are now complete.
10. Touch RETURN to return to the Sample Metering Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Hysteresis Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
> Compare all mean, max, min values to current specifications.> Touch DISPLAY DATA to view data.
PT01C
SH SM PM INOP
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
MEAN MAX MIN
Hysteresis : 0.919 2.016 0.000Pressure P0 : 2.266 2.285 2.266Pressure P1 : 4.746 4.980 4.375Pressure P2 : 2.266 2.305 2.227
DISPLAYDATA
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–43
Diagnostics
Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection
Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection
3–44 VITROS 250/350 C
To run the sample metering drop/slide detection test:
1. Touch SAMPLE METERING on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch DROP DETECTION. The A/D reference voltage check is conducted after sample metering is reset. The data is displayed on the screen.
3. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.
SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT00A
LEAK/HYSTERESIS
DROPDETECTION
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Leak Test – A/D Ref. Voltage Check
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
> Compare Precision Reference Voltage, Resolution Voltage and Ambient > Pressure to current specifications.> Do you wish to continue with the Leak Test? (Y/N) :
PT04A
SH SM PM INOP
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
Reference Resolution4.941 Vdc 0.039 Vdc
Ambient Pressure = 2.480
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection
4. You are prompted to continue with the detection test or not.
— To discontinue, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
— To continue, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
If you continue with the detection test, the following screen displays:
5. Open the right front door of the analyzer.
6. Empty the slide disposal box, and put in a new slide disposal box liner.
SAMPLE METERING PERFORMANCE TESTS Drop/Slide Detection Test – A/D Ref. Voltage Check
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
PT03A
SH SM SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP
SAMPLING
1) Empty used slide bin and put in a clean catch cloth.2) Open incubator cover and put low transmissionslide on labelled slot.3) Insert low transmission Tool Slide completely into incubator.4) Close incubator cover and touch START.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPSTART
Slide-Disposal Box
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–45
Diagnostics
Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection
3–46 VITROS 250/350 C
7. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
8. Open the incubator cover.
Incubator Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection
9. Put a low transmission slide (magnesium) on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator. Position the slide with the ribbed side down, notch toward the incubator.
10. Push the slide completely into the incubator.
11. Close the incubator cover.
12. Touch START. The detection test will begin.
13. When you see the screen prompts, retrieve the low transmission test slide from the slide disposal box.
14. Open the incubator cover.
15. Insert a high transmission test slide (albumin) the same way you inserted the low transmission slide.
16. Push the slide completely into the incubator.
17. Close the incubator cover.
18. Touch START.
The slide is again discarded and the test is completed. Retrieve the high transmission test slide from the slide disposal box.
Slide
Incubator
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–47
Diagnostics
Testing Sample Metering Drop Detection
3–48 VITROS 250/350 C
19. The data generated is displayed on the screen. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.
20. Touch RETURN to return to the Sample Metering Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Incubator
Incubator Yt
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
ou can use these performance tests to verify or assess the operation of he incubator disk and those mechanisms that control it.
Two incubator performance tests are available:
• Incubator Pad Reflectance—Verifies that there is a consistent level of reflectance from one incubator pad to the next in the incubator. This ensures accurate and precise slide readings for any test located in any incubator nest position.
• Incubator Position Timing—Verifies that the nest-to-nest rotational timing is consistent for all nests on the incubator disk. This also verifies that the aperture in each nest is present and centered over the reflectometer read station at a constant time interval for slide readings to be taken. This ensures accurate and precise slide readings for any test located in any incubator nest position.
Testing Incubator Pad Reflectance N
OTE: The white and black correction factors must be set before this test will run correctly. Refer to the “Rate/CM Correction Factor Test” in the “Setup/Adjust” section earlier in this chapter.To test the incubator pad reflectance:
1. Touch INCUBATOR on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch PAD REFLECTANCE.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Incubator
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
PT15A
READY
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
PADREFLECTANCE
POSITIONTIMING
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–49
Diagnostics
Testing Incubator Pad Reflectance
3–50 VITRO
3. Touch START.
4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Incubator Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – IncubatorPad Reflectance Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
PT16A
READY
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
Mean Min. = Reflectance Value
Mean Max. = Reflectance Value
Range = (Max. Mean – Min. Mean)
Grand Mean = (Mean of all Slot Means)
Stand Dev = (Std. Dev. of all Slots)
> Press START to execute test
START
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – IncubatorPad Reflectance Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
PT16B
INC R/C INOP
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
Mean Min. = 0.8841 Reflectance Value
Mean Max. = 0.9043 Reflectance Value
Range = 0.0202 (Max. Mean – Min. Mean)
Grand Mean = 0.8939 (Mean of all Slot Means)
Stand Dev = 0.0047 (Std. Dev. of all Slots)
> Compare Range and Grand Mean to Current Specifications.> Press DISPLAY_MORE_DATA to view the means and raw data.
STARTDISPLAY
MORE DATA
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Testing Incubator Position Timing
Testing Incubator Position Timing
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
To test the incubator position timing:
1. Touch INCUBATOR on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch POSITION TIMING.
3. Touch START. The prompt line will display the number of revolutions completed.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Incubator
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
PT15A
READY
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
PADREFLECTANCE
POSITIONTIMING
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – IncubatorPosition Timing Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
PT17A
INC INOP
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
> Revolution number 7 is complete.
START
Inc. Avg. Time Standard Min. Time Max. TimePos. (msec) Deviation (msec) (msec)
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–51
Diagnostics
Testing Incubator Position Timing
3–52 VITROS 250/350 C
When all 15 revolutions are completed, the test results will display on the screen.
4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Incubator Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – IncubatorPosition Timing Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE OFFON
PT17A
INC INOP
SAMPLING
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
> Revolution number 7 is complete.
START
Inc. Avg. Time Standard Min. Time Max. TimePos. (msec) Deviation (msec) (msec)
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – IncubatorPosition Timing Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
PT17B
HELPRETURNRETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
> Compare each Avg., S.D., Min., and Max. value to current specifications.> 15 of 15 revolutions were completed.
START
Inc. Avg. Time Standard Min. Time Max. TimePos. (msec) Deviation (msec) (msec)
1 193.07 0.2582 193 1942 192.53 1.5523 190 1953 194.33 1.5430 192 1974 191.27 1.5796 189 1945 193.20 0.6761 192 1946 192.80 0.8619 190 1947 192.27 1.7099 190 1948 193.53 1.1872 193 1969 193.53 1.1872 192 19710 192.33 1.3973 190 19411 193.13 0.3519 193 19412 192.80 1.2071 190 194
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETEINC INOP OFFON
SAMPLING
DISPLAYMOREDATA
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
PSID Scanner
PSID Scanner
Version 2.0 VITRO
NOTE: The Positive Sample Identification (PSID) Scanner is an optional accessory.
Two PSID scanner performance tests are available when a PSID scanner is installed:
• Tool Side Tests—Checks the performance of the PSID scanner by reading the bar code samples at the limit of the specification and reporting the number of scans necessary for a good read. You will need the PSID Alignment Tool, TL-4531, to perform these tests.
• User Samples Test—Checks the quality of sample bar codes you generate by reporting the number of scans necessary for a good read. This test can assist you in diagnosing a malfunction that may be caused by the print quality of your bar codes.
Performing the Tool Side Test
To check the performance of the PSID scanner using TL-4531:1. Touch PSID SCANNER on the main Performance Tests screen.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – PSID
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH INOPLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT45B
TOOLSIDE
1
TOOLSIDE
2
> Touch a target to select a test.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
USERSAMPLES
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–53
Diagnostics
Performing the Tool Side Test
3–54 VITROS 250/350 C
2. Place PSID Alignment Tool, TL-4531, in an empty sample tray. The tool has two labeled sides, Side 1 and Side 2. Side 1 checks the capability of the scanner to read a range of gray densities on bar codes. Side 2 checks the capability of the scanner to read a range of bar widths on bar codes.
Place the tool with Side 1 facing the front of the sample tray.
3. Place a 16 mm sample tube in each tray location behind the alignment tool. This will hold the tool in place to ensure that it can be read by the PSID scanner.
4. Touch TOOL SIDE 1 to check the capability of the PSID scanner to read a range of gray densities.
5. Type the number of the tray that has been prepared with the alignment tool, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
The results of the test display on the screen. The PSID scanner will beep once each time a successful detection of a bar code occurs.
Universal Sample Tray
PSID Test tool
Insert a 16 mm tube behindTest tool
in each location
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Performing the Tool Side Test
6. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.
7. Touch RETURN to return to the main PSID Performance Tests screen.
8. Remove the alignment tool and the sample tubes from the sample tray.
9. Place the alignment tool with Side 2 facing the front of the sample tray.
10. Place a 16 mm sample tube in each tray location behind the alignment tool. This will hold the tool in place to ensure that it can be read by the PSID scanner.
11. Touch TOOL SIDE 2 to check the capability of the PSID scanner to read a range of bar widths.
12. Type the number of the tray that has been prepared with the alignment tool, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
The results of the test display on the screen. The PSID scanner will beep once each time a successful detection of a bar code occurs.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – PSID
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH INOPLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT45C
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Test Results for Tray: 1Sample Id Rel Decode Pos
12345678910
Code 3 of 9 Check Digit: OFF
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–55
Diagnostics
Performing the Tool Side Test
3–56 VITROS 250/350 C
13. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.
14. Touch RETURN to return to the main PSID Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – PSID
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH INOPLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT45C
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Test Results for Tray: 1Sample Id Rel Decode Pos
12345678910
Code 3 of 9 Check Digit: OFF
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Performing the User Samples Test
Performing the User Samples Test
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
To check the quality of bar codes you generate:
1. Touch PSID SCANNER on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch USER SAMPLES.
3. Place sample tubes with your bar codes in an empty sample tray.
4. Type the tray number containing your samples, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
5. The results of the test display on the screen. The PSID will beep once each time a successful bar code detection occurs.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – PSID
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH INOPLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT45B
TOOLSIDE
1
TOOLSIDE
2
> Touch a target to select a test.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
USERSAMPLES
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–57
Diagnostics
Performing the User Samples Test
3–58 VITROS 250/350 C
6. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.
7. Touch RETURN to return to the main PSID Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – PSID
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH INOPLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT45C
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Test Results for Tray: 2Sample Id Rel Decode Pos
1 ABCD11 162 ABCD47 123 ***************4 ABCD27 125 ABCD09 166 ABCD02 157 ABCD46 168 ABCD10 109 ABCD48 1110 ABCD49 10
Code 3 of 9 Check Digit: OFF
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Reflectometer
Reflectometer Yv
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
ou can use these performance tests to verify proper operation of the arious mechanisms that make up the reflectometer assembly.
Three reflectometer performance tests are available:
• Shutter Test—Verifies the performance of the shutter and those mechanisms involved with the shutter operation. To get precise and accurate results, the shutter must be in the correct position (open or closed) at a specified time.
• Static Test—Evaluates the reflectometer read precision without moving the incubator disk. Having the rotor remain stationary removes any imprecision resulting from the movement or performance of the disk. The more precise the reading taken by the reflectometer assembly, the greater the precision of the test result.
• Dynamic Test—Evaluates reflectometer precision and accuracy. All the readings are taken just as they would be if running a patient test.
Testing the Shutter
To test the shutter:1. Touch REFLECTOMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch SHUTTER TEST.
3. Touch START. The test occurs automatically. The data collected is displayed on the screen.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT30A
SHUTTER TEST
STATIC TEST
> Touch a target to select a function.
DYNAMIC TEST
RETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN HELP
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–59
Diagnostics
Testing the Shutter
3–60 VITROS 250/350 C
4. Print the screen by pressing the PrtScr key.
5. Touch RETURN to return to the Reflectometer Performance Tests screen, or press RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Shutter Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT31A– Data Screen –
Open/Done Open/Done Close/Done Close/Done––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– –––––––––––––––––––––––––––
58 59 59 5959 59 59 5959 59 58 5859 59 59 5959 60 59 5959 5859 5960 5959 5959 59
> Compare Open/Done and Close/Done times to current specifications.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Performing the Reflectometer Static Test
Performing the Reflecto-meter Static Test
Version 2.0 VITRO
To check the reflectometer static precision:
1. Touch REFLECTOMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch STATIC TEST.
3. The prompt, “Center the tool slide? (Y/N),” appears on the prompt line.
— Type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to use the incubator’s permanent reference slide.
The wavelength selection screen will display.
4. Touch the desired wavelength target or touch the ALL WVL target if you want data for all of the reflectometer wavelengths.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT30A
SHUTTER TEST
STATIC TEST
> Touch a target to select a function.
DYNAMIC TEST
RETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN HELP
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Wavelength Selection
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT31B
400
460
> Touch a wavelength target to select a single, or all wavelengths.
540
600
630
670
680
ALL WVL
340
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–61
Diagnostics
Performing the Reflectometer Static Test
3–62 VITROS 250/350 C
5. The prompt, “Interleave the filters? (Y/N),” appears on the prompt line.
— Type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
The shutter operating mode selection screen will display.
6. Touch the desired shutter operating mode.
— Normal Reads—Readings are taken while the shutter is operating as it would during slide readings. Both signal and dark readings are taken.
— Shutter Open—Readings are taken with the shutter held open. Only signal readings are taken.
— Shutter Closed—Readings are taken with the shutter closed. Only dark readings are taken.
7. Instructions for inserting the tool slide will display if you answered “Y” to the prompt in step 3. Continue with step 8.
— If you answered “N” to the prompt, these instructions will not display. Skip to step 15.
8. Open the right front door of the analyzer.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Static Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT31C
SHUTTER OPEN
SHUTTER CLOSED
> Select a test type.
NORMAL READS
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPSTART
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Performing the Reflectometer Static Test
9. Empty the slide disposal box, and put in a new slide disposal box liner.
10. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
11. Open the incubator cover.
Slide-Disposal Box
Incubator Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–63
Diagnostics
Performing the Reflectometer Static Test
3–64 VITRO
12. Put the tool slide TL-4502 on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator. Position the slide with the word “TOP” facing up.
13. Push the slide completely into the incubator.
14. Close the incubator cover.
15. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
16. Close the right front cover of the analyzer.
17. Touch START.
18. When the test is completed, the results will display on the screen. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
TOP
Tool Slide
Incubator
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Performing the Reflectometer Static Test
19. Touch DISPLAY MORE DATA.
20. Print that screen also by pressing the PrtScr key.
21. If you used a tool slide, remove it from the slide disposal box.
22. Touch RETURN to return to the Reflectometer Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Static Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT31D
> Touch DISPLAY MORE DATA to view detailed data.
– Summary Screen –
Wavelength Mean SD Mean SD(nm) Dark Dark Signal Signal %CV*1K––– ––––––– ––––––– ––––––– ––––––– –––––––340 260 0.5477 14849 40.5126 1.6660400460540600630670680
> Compare SD of Dark and/or Signal reads to current specifications.> Compare %CV*1K to current specifications.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
DISPLAYMOREDATA
RETURN HELP
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–65
Diagnostics
Running the Dynamic Test
Running the Dynamic Test
3–66 VITROS 250/350 C
NOTE: Running the dynamic test on all reflectometer wavelengths takes approximately thirty minutes.
To run the reflectometer dynamic test:
1. Touch REFLECTOMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch DYNAMIC TEST.
3. Touch the desired wavelength target, or touch the ALL WVL target if you want data for all of the reflectometer wavelengths.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT30A
SHUTTER TEST
STATIC TEST
> Touch a target to select a function.
DYNAMIC TEST
RETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN HELP
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Wavelength Selection
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT31B
400
460
> Touch a wavelength target to select a single, or all wavelengths.
540
600
630
670
680
ALL WVL
340
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Running the Dynamic Test
4. The prompt, “Do you wish to use an EXTERNAL SLIDE?,” appears on the prompt line.
— Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard if you want to use an external reference slide. Do not insert the reference slide until prompted to do so. Enter the assay value of the slide, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
— Type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard if you want to use the incubator’s permanent reference slide.
5. Enter the assay value for the wavelengths selected, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Dynamic Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT33A
> Type Y or N and press the ENTER key:
Selected wavelength = 340ns
Do you wish to use an EXTERNAL SLIDE for precision and accuracy reads?
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–67
Diagnostics
Running the Dynamic Test
3–68 VITROS 250/350 C
6. Instructions for inserting the external reference slide will display if you answered “Y” to the prompt in step 4. Continue with step 7.
— If you answered “N” to the prompt, these instructions will not display. Skip to step 14.
7. Open the right front door of the analyzer.
8. Empty the slide disposal box, and put in a new slide disposal box liner.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Dynamic Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250INC R/C INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT33B
Selected wavelength = 340ns
1) Empty used slide bin and put in a clean catch cloth.
2) Open incubator cover and put slide on labelled slot.
3) Insert Tool Slide completely into incubator.
4) Close incubator cover and touch START.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPSTART
---------------------------------------340nm —> ASSAY value >.8569<---------------------------------------
Slide-Disposal Box
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Running the Dynamic Test
9. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
10. Open the incubator cover.
Incubator Cover
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–69
Diagnostics
Running the Dynamic Test
3–70 VITROS 250/350 C
11. Put the external reference slide on the labeled slot at the front of the incubator.
12. Push the slide completely into the incubator.
13. Close the incubator cover.
14. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
15. Close the right front door of the analyzer.
16. Touch START.
17. When the test is complete, the results will display on the screen. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
Slide
Incubator
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Running the Dynamic Test
18. If you used an external reference slide, remove it from the slide disposal box.
19. Touch RETURN to return to the Reflectometer Performance Tests screen. Touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Reflectometer – Dynamic Test
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT33E– Summary Screen –
Wavelength Mean SD Mean SD(nm) Dark Dark Reference Reference %CV*/K––– ––––––– ––––––– ––––––– ––––––– –––––––340 260.1 0.5074 14846.8 53.4210 1.2616400460540600630670680
> Compare Dark and Reference SD to SD specification.> Compare %CV*/K to current specification.>Touch DISPLAY MORE DATA to view detailed data.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
DISPLAYMOREDATA
RETURN HELP
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–71
Diagnostics
Reference Metering
Reference Metering Yt
3–72 VITROS 250/350 C
ou can use these performance tests to verify the proper functioning of he Reference Fluid Metering Assembly.
Two reference metering performance tests are available.
• Timing Test—Verifies that the reference fluid metering assembly movements are completed within the time range allowed and within the step range allowed for the reference fluid metering assembly motor. If either the timing or the step range is violated, the ability of the analyzer to deliver a drop of reference fluid to the PM slide properly, to position a drop of reference fluid on the slide properly, or to dispense a drop of reference fluid on the slide accurately will be compromised.
• System Tests—Verifies the proper functioning of the reference fluid metering assembly signal processing system, the transducer, and the pump. The reference fluid metering system is checked for leaks. The system test is composed of four subtests.
— Signal Processing Test – Measures the reference coarse gain for the A/D converter.
NOTE: The remaining three subtests are done with the reference tip sealed, creating a closed system. The pressure can now be increased or decreased within the system.
— Transducer Check Test – Monitors the transducer for the effects of changing pressure.
— Leak Test – Looks for leaks in the system. The pressure within the system is increased and/or decreased. Once the system has stabilized from the pressure change, the pressure within the system should not change until the pump is activated for another pressure change. A change would indicate a leak in the system.
— Hysteresis Test – Monitors the consistency of response to increasing and decreasing pressure changes. The pump is the portion of the reference fluid metering assembly that causes the pressure changes. (Hysteresis is a term that indicates the ability or inability of a stressed system to return to the original state when the cause of stress is removed.)
The four subtests are carried out in this order. You can end the system tests after completing each subtest or continue with the next test in the sequence. Whether the next test is performed depends on the success of the test just completed. If completed results warrant further investigation with the system tests, then you should conduct the next test.
— If you choose to stop the system tests before all four subtests have been completed, the test must be started from the beginning to perform the subtest(s) missed; for instance, you cannot go directly to the leak test without first doing the signal processing test and the transducer check test.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Testing the Reference Fluid Metering Assembly Timing
Testing the Reference Fluid Metering Assembly Timing
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
To test the reference fluid metering assembly timing:
1. Touch REF MET & IMM RATE on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch TIMING TEST in the Reference Metering column.
3. Touch START ten times until ten repetitions are displayed on the screen.
4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Reference Metering—Immuno-Rate Test Selection screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
Reference Metering – Immuno-Rate Test Selection
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
PT20A
HELPRETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENURETURN
TIMING TEST
SYSTEM TEST
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test
Reference Metering
Immuno-RateMetering
TIMING TEST
SYSTEM TEST
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–73
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
Running the System Tests
3–74 VITROS 250/350 C
To run the reference fluid metering assembly system tests:
1. Touch REF MET & IMM RATE on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch SYSTEM TEST in the Reference Metering column.
3. Touch START. The reference metering arm will lift out of the reservoir to the tip-change position. The prompt line instructs you to install the tool reservoir and a new tip.
Reference Metering – Immuno-Rate Test Selection
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
PT20A
HELPRETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENURETURN
TIMING TEST
SYSTEM TEST
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test
Reference Metering
Immuno-RateMetering
TIMING TEST
SYSTEM TEST
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH SM PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch START to begin test.
PT22ADIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – System Check
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPSTART
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
4. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
5. Swing up the arm so it forms a right angle with the reference -metering assembly.
Reference Metering Arm
Reference Metering Assembly
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–75
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
3–76 VITROS 250/350 C
6. With one hand, pull the lever to eject the tip. Be prepared to catch the tip with your other hand.
7. Steady the arm with one hand. Insert a new tip by pushing the new tip firmly into place. You will hear a click.
8. While the reference metering arm is still rotated away from the fluid reservoir, lift the retainer lid that holds the reservoir.
9. Remove the reservoir.
Lever Micro TipVITROS
Retainer Lid
Housing
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
10. Place the tool reservoir, Part No. 995298, into the reservoir housing.
11. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
12. Touch CONTINUE. The reference arm assembly will return to the “home” position, and the results of the signal processing test will display on the screen.
13. Press the PrtScr key to print the results of the signal processing check.
14. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?” appears on the prompt line.
— To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 22.
RM/IR
TL-4538
Tool Reservoir
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH SM PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? (Y) :
PT22BDIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – System Check
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Signal Processing Check
COARSE GAIN
2.305 Vdc
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–77
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
3–78 VITROS 250/350 C
— To continue to the transducer check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the transducer check.
15. Press the PrtScr key to print the results.
16. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?”
appears on the prompt line.
— To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 22.
— To continue to the leak check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the leak check.
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH SM PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? (Y) :
PT22CDIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – System Check
Transducer Check
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Rep. Vdc Delta Rep. Vdc Delta Rep. Vdc Delta Rep. Vdc Delta1 2..109 0.039 6 1.953 0.020 1 2.871 0.059 6 3.320 0.0982 2.070 0.039 7 1.934 0.020 2 2.949 0.078 7 3.418 0.0983 2.031 0.039 8 1.914 0.020 3 3.047 0.098 8 3.496 0.0784 1.992 0.039 9 1.875 0.039 4 3.125 0.078 9 3.594 0.0985 1.973 0.020 10 1.875 0.000 5 3.223 0.098 10 3.672 0.078
ASPIRATE DISPENSE
Max = 2.109Min = 1.875Mean Delta Pressure = 0.020
Max = 3.672Min = 2.871Mean Delta Pressure = 0.078
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH SM PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare the values to current specifications. > Touch START to begin test.
PT21ADIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – Reference Timing
Rep. HOME to Pre-Dispense Pre-Dispense to Dispense Dispense to HOMETime (sec.) Steps Time (sec.) Steps Time (sec.) Steps
1 2.121 2802 .203 287 1.799 2978
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPSTART
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
17. Press the PrtScr key to print the results.
18. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?” appears on the prompt line.
— To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 22.
— To continue to the hysteresis check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the hysteresis check.
19. Press the PrtScr key to print the results.
20. Touch RETURN.
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH SM PM INOPLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? (Y) :
PT22DDIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – System Check
Leak Check
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Ambient Pressure = 2.813 VdcAmbient-Aspirate 0 sec. read = 0.137Ambient-Dispense 0 sec. read= 0.586Aspirate Leak Rate = 0.020Dispense Leak Rate = 0.098
DISPLAYDATA
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH SM PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare the values to current specifications.
PT22LDIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – System Check
Hysteresis Check
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPDISPLAY
DATA
MEAN MAX MINHysteresis: 0.117 0.293 0.000 Vdc
Pressure P0: 2.891 3.145 2.754 VdcP1: 2.813 2.969 2.715 VdcP2: 3.027 3.281 2.832 Vdc
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–79
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
3–80 VITROS 250/350 C
21. Install a new reference tip.
22. Replace the tool reservoir with a new reservoir.
23. Touch RETURN to return to the Reference Metering—Immuno-Rate Test Selection screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
> Please replace tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Reference Metering – Remove Reservoir
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SH SM PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT20C
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Immuno-Rate Metering
Immuno-Rate Metering Yt
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
ou can use these performance tests to verify the proper functioning of he immuno-rate (IR) metering assembly.
Two reference metering performance tests are available.
• Timing Test—Verifies that the IR metering assembly movements are completed within the time range allowed and within the step range allowed for the IR Metering Assembly motor. If either the timing or the step range is violated, the ability of the analyzer to deliver a drop of Immuno-Wash Fluid to the IR slide properly, to position a drop of Immuno-Wash Fluid on the slide properly, or to dispense a drop of Immuno-Wash Fluid on the slide accurately will be compromised.
• System Tests—Verifies the proper functioning of the IR metering assembly signal processing system, the transducer, and the pump. The IR metering system is checked for leaks. The system test is composed of four subtests.
— Signal Processing Test – Measures the reference coarse gain for the A/D converter.
NOTE: The remaining three subtests are done with the reference tip sealed, creating a closed system. The pressure can now be increased or decreased within the system.
— Transducer Check Test – Monitors the transducer for the effects of changing pressure.
— Leak Test – Looks for leaks in the system. The pressure within the system is increased and/or decreased. Once the system has stabilized from the pressure change, the pressure within the system should not change until the pump is activated for another pressure change. A change would indicate a leak in the system.
— Hysteresis Test – Monitors the consistency of response to increasing and decreasing pressure changes. The pump is the portion of the IR metering assembly that causes the pressure changes. (Hysteresis is a term that indicates the ability or inability of a stressed system to return to the original state when the cause of stress is removed.)
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–81
Diagnostics
Testing the Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly Timing
3–82 VITROS 250/350 C
• The four subtests are carried out in this order. You can end the system tests after completing each subtest or continue with the next test in the sequence. Whether the next test is performed depends on the success of the test just completed. If completed results warrant further investigation with the system tests, then you should conduct the next test.
— If you choose to stop the system tests before all four subtests have been completed, the test must be restarted from the beginning to perform the subtest(s) missed; for instance, you cannot go directly to the leak test without first doing the signal processing test and the transducer check test.
Testing the Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly Timing
To test the immuno-rate metering assembly timing:1. Touch REF MET & IMM RATE on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch TIMING TEST in the Immuno-Rate Metering column.
3. Touch START ten times until ten repetitions are displayed on the screen.
Reference Metering – Immuno-Rate Test Selection
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
PT20A
HELPRETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENURETURN
TIMING TEST
SYSTEM TEST
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test
Reference Metering
Immuno-RateMetering
TIMING TEST
SYSTEM TEST
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing the Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly Timing
4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Reference Metering—Immuno-Rate Test Selection screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
Aug 09 xx
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare the values to current specifications. > Touch START to begin test.
PT23ADIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – Immuno-Rate Timing
Rep. HOME to Dispense Dispense to HOMETime (sec.) Steps Time (sec.) Steps
1 2.121 2802 1.799 2978
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPSTART
READY
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–83
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
Running the System Tests
3–84 VITROS 250/350 C
To run the immuno-rate metering assembly system tests:
1. Touch REF MET & IMM RATE on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch SYSTEM TEST in the Immuno-Rate Metering column.
3. Touch START. The immuno-rate metering arm will lift out of the reservoir to the tip-change position. The prompt line instructs you to install the tool reservoir and a new tip.
Reference Metering – Immuno-Rate Test Selection
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
PT20A
HELPRETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENURETURN
TIMING TEST
SYSTEM TEST
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test
Reference Metering
Immuno-RateMetering
TIMING TEST
SYSTEM TEST
Aug 09 xx
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch START to begin test.
PT24ADIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – System Check
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPSTART
READY
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
4. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
5. Swing up the arm so it forms a right angle with the immuno-rate metering assembly.
Immuno-Rate Metering Arm
Immuno-Rate Metering Assembly
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–85
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
3–86 VITROS 250/350 C
6. With one hand, pull the lever to eject the tip. Be prepared to catch the tip with your other hand.
7. Steady the arm with one hand. Insert a new tip by pushing the new tip firmly into place. You will hear a click.
8. While the immuno-rate metering arm is still rotated away from the fluid reservoir, lift the retainer lid that holds the reservoir.
9. Remove the reservoir.
LeverVitros Micro Tip
Immuno-Wash Fluid Reservoir
Cover
Housing
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
10. Place the tool reservoir, Part No. 995298, into the reservoir housing.
11. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
12. Touch CONTINUE. The immuno-rate arm assembly will return to the “home” position, and the results of the signal processing test will display on the screen.
13. Press the PrtScr key to print the results of the signal processing check.
RM/IR
TL-4538
Tool Reservoir
Aug 09 xx
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? (Y) :
PT24BDIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – System Check
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Signal Processing Check
COARSE GAIN
4.980 Vdc
READY
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–87
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
3–88 VITROS 250/350 C
14. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?” appears on the prompt line.
— To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 21.
— To continue to the transducer check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the transducer check.
15. Press the PrtScr key to print the results.
16. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?” appears on the prompt line.
— To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 21.
— To continue to the leak check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the leak check.
Aug 09 xx
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? (Y) :
PT24CDIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – System Check
Transducer Check
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Rep. Vdc Delta Rep. Vdc Delta Rep. Vdc Delta Rep. Vdc Delta1 2..109 0.039 6 1.953 0.020 1 2.871 0.059 6 3.320 0.0982 2.070 0.039 7 1.934 0.020 2 2.949 0.078 7 3.418 0.0983 2.031 0.039 8 1.914 0.020 3 3.047 0.098 8 3.496 0.0784 1.992 0.039 9 1.875 0.039 4 3.125 0.078 9 3.594 0.0985 1.973 0.020 10 1.875 0.000 5 3.223 0.098 10 3.672 0.078
ASPIRATE DISPENSE
Max = 2.109Min = 1.875Mean Delta Pressure = 0.020
Max = 3.672Min = 2.871Mean Delta Pressure = 0.078
READY
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
17. Press the PrtScr key to print the results.
18. The prompt, “Do you wish to continue the next system test?” appears on the prompt line.
— To stop testing, type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. You will be prompted to replace the tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip. Skip to step 21.
— To continue to the hysteresis check, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The screen displays the results of the hysteresis check.
Aug 09 xx
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare the values to current specifications. > Do you wish to continue the next system test? (Y) :
PT24DDIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – System Check
Leak Check
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Ambient Pressure = 2.637 VdcAmbient-Aspirate 0 sec. read = 0.137Ambient-Dispense 0 sec. read= 0.488Aspirate Leak Rate = 0.059Dispense Leak Rate = 0.078
DISPLAYDATA
READY
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–89
Diagnostics
Running the System Tests
3–90 VITRO
19. Press the PrtScr key to print the results.
20. Touch RETURN.
21. Install a new micro tip.
22. Replace the tool reservoir with a new reservoir.
Aug 09 xx
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare the values to current specifications.
PT24LDIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – System Check
Hysteresis Check
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPDISPLAY
DATA
MEAN MAX MINHysteresis: 0.117 0.293 0.000 Vdc
Pressure P0: 2.891 3.145 2.754 VdcP1: 2.813 2.969 2.715 VdcP2: 3.027 3.281 2.832 Vdc
READY
> Please replace tool reservoir and tip with a new reservoir and tip.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Test Immuno-Rate – Remove Reservoir
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Aug 09 xx
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT20C
READY
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Electrometer
Electrometer Ye
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
ou can use these performance tests to run all mechanical and lectrical electrometer sequences.
Five electrometer performance tests are available.
• Normal Cycle–Verifies the integrity of the electrometer using normal slide reading operations. Verifies the mechanical and electrical operation.
• Contact Drive Timing–Verifies the proper operation of the motor that moves the contact points and that the motor can move the contact points to their intended destination within the time allowed in the software.
• Auto Checks—Verifies the electrical operation of the electrometer by taking readings while the contact points are up, down, or cycling. Any deviations from normal would indicate that the electrometer was at fault rather than any external mechanism.
— Contacts Up—measurements are taken with the contact points in the up position.
— Contacts Down—measurements are taken with the contacts down against the internal test pad.
— Cycle Contacts—basically the same as a normal cycle except the incubator and PM eject blade are not actuated. This isolates electrometer problems to outside or to internal origin.
• Extended Auto Checks—Verifies the integrity of the electronics of the electrometer to uncover extreme bias or surface currents that may adversely affect the accuracy of any slide readings taken, and to identify the presence of any current leaks due to impedance failures or surface contamination.
• Basic Modes—Allows independent mode control and readings from the electrometer. This test is for Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer use only.
NOTE: The electrometer is reset after each test is completed. However, the electrometer A/D converter recalibrates only when you exit Diagnostics and return to normal operations, when you power down the analyzer and then power up, or when you perform a full reset.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–91
Diagnostics
Testing Electrometer Normal Cycle
Testing Electrometer Normal Cycle
3–92 VITROS 250/350 C
To test the electrometer normal cycle:
1. Touch ELECTROMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch NORMAL CYCLE.
3. Touch START. The test occurs automatically. Data generated is displayed on the screen when the test is complete.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function; then touch START.
PT35A
CONTACT DRIVE TIMING
NORMAL CYCLE
EXTENDED AUTO
CHECKS
AUTO CHECKS
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
BASICMODES
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing Electrometer Normal Cycle
4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Electrometer Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – ElectrometerNormal Cycle
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare Avg., S.D., Min & Max values to current specifications.
PT35B
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
DISPLAYALL
DATA
High Z High Z Signal Slide Low Z Low ZZero Ref. Validation Zero Ref.
Avg. = +0.099 –199.964 +14.297 –199.956 +0.099 –199.964S.D. = 0.0153 0.0153 3.8298 0.0153 0.0153 0.0153Min. = +0.084 –199.971 +5.012 –199.964 +0.092 –199.971Max. = +0.114 –199.948 +18.760 –199.941 +0.114 –199.948
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–93
Diagnostics
Testing Electrometer Contact Drive Timing
Testing Electrometer Contact Drive Timing
3–94 VITROS 250/350 C
To test the electrometer contact drive timing:
1. Touch ELECTROMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch CONTACT DRIVE TIMING.
3. Touch START. The test occurs, and the data generated by the test is displayed on the screen when the test is complete.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function; then touch START.
PT35A
CONTACT DRIVE TIMING
NORMAL CYCLE
EXTENDED AUTO
CHECKS
AUTO CHECKS
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
BASICMODES
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing Electrometer Contact Drive Timing
4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Electrometer Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–95
Diagnostics
Testing Electrometer Auto Checks
Testing Electrometer Auto Checks
3–96 VITROS 250/350 C
To test electrometer auto checks:
1. Touch ELECTROMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch AUTO CHECKS.
IMPORTANT: Before you perform Part B or Part C, be sure there is no slide in the read station and that the contact pad under the reflectometer is clean.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function; then touch START.
PT35A
CONTACT DRIVE TIMING
NORMAL CYCLE
EXTENDED AUTO
CHECKS
AUTO CHECKS
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
BASICMODES
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – ElectrometerAuto checks
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function; then touch START.
PT36A
CONTACTSDOWN
(PART B)
CONTACTSUP
(PART A)
CYCLECONTACTS (PART C)
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing Electrometer Auto Checks
NOTE: The following instructions describe how to perform the three parts of this test in sequence—Part A first, Part B second, and Part C third. You can, however, end the auto checks test after completing part A or Part B, or continue with the next test in the sequence.
Depending on the nature of the problem, you do not need to run Part A first. You could run Part B only or Part C only.
3. Touch CONTACTS UP (PART A).
4. Touch START. The test occurs and the results are displayed on the screen when the test is complete.
5. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
6. To continue to contacts down (Part B), type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when you see the prompt, “Continue with the next test?”
The results for the auto checks contacts down test are displayed on the screen.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – ElectrometerAuto Checks – Contacts Up
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Continue with the next test? (Y/N) : > Compare Avg., S.D., Min & Max values to current specifications.
PT36B
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
DISPLAYALL
DATA
High Z Zero High Z Ref. Low Z Zero Low Z Ref.
Avg. = –0.328 –200.986 –0.328 –200.986S.D. = 0.0076 0.0076 0.0076 0.0076Min. = –0.328 –200.994 –0.336 –200.994Max. = –0.320 –200.978 –0.320 –200.978
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–97
Diagnostics
Testing Electrometer Auto Checks
3–98 VITROS 250/350 C
7. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
8. To continue to cycle contacts (Part C), type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard at the “Continue with the next test?” prompt.
The results for the auto checks cycle contacts test are displayed on the screen.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – ElectrometerAuto Checks – Contacts Down
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Continue with the next test? (Y/N) : > Compare Avg., S.D., Min & Max values to current specifications.
PT36H
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
DISPLAYALL
DATA
High Z Zero High Z Ref. Low Z Zero Low Z Ref.
Avg. = –0.412 –0.404 –0.404 –0.404S.D. = 0.0076 0.0076 0.0076 0.0076Min. = –0.412 –0.404 –0.404 –0.404Max. = –0.397 –0.397 –0.389 –0.397
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing Electrometer Auto Checks
9. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
10. Touch RETURN to return to the main Electrometer Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – ElectrometerAuto Checks – Cycle Contacts
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare Avg., S.D., Min & Max values to current specifications.
PT36N
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
DISPLAYALL
DATA
High Z Zero High Z Ref. Low Z Zero Low Z Ref.
Avg. = –0.328 –200.978 –0.328 –200.987S.D. = 0.0153 0.0153 0.0153 0.0153Min. = –0.343 –200.986 –0.343 –200.994Max. = –0.313 –200.963 –0.320 –200.963
Contacts Up
Signal Sig. Valid. Low Z Zero Low Z Ref.
Avg. = –0.397 –0.389 –0.397 –0.397S.D. = 0.0153 0.0076 0.0076 0.0076Min. = –0.404 –0.397 –0.404 –0.404Max. = –0.381 –0.381 –0.381 –0.381
Contacts Down
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–99
Diagnostics
Testing Electrometer Extended Auto Checks
Testing Electrometer Extended Auto Checks
3–100 VITRO
To test electrometer auto checks:
1. Touch ELECTROMETER on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch EXTENDED AUTO CHECKS.
3. Touch START. The test occurs and the data generated by the test is displayed on the screen.
4. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Electrometer
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function; then touch START.
PT35A
CONTACT DRIVE TIMING
NORMAL CYCLE
EXTENDED AUTO
CHECKS
AUTO CHECKS
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
BASICMODES
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – ElectrometerExtended Auto Checks – Part A
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Continue with the next test? (Y/N) : > Compare results to current specifications.
PT35J
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
High Z Zero High Z Ref. Low Z Zero Low Z Ref.
–0.336 +199.392 –0.336 +199.392–0.336 +199.392 –0.336 +199.392–0.336 +199.392 –0.336 +199.392
Contacts Up
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing Electrometer Extended Auto Checks
5. To continue to Part B of the test, type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when you see the prompt, “Continue with the next test?”
The results for the extended auto checks, part B, are displayed on the screen.
6. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen.
7. Touch RETURN to return to the main Electrometer Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – ElectrometerExtended Auto Checks – Part B
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare results to current specifications.
PT35K
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
Bias (+) Bias (–) Leakage (+) Leakage (–)–0.359 –0.366 +199.353 –200.994–0.359 –0.366 +199.353 –200.994–0.359 –0.366 +199.353 –200.994
Derived Values (Corrected leakage = Leakage – Bias)Corrected Leakage (+) Corrected Leakage (–)
+199.712 –200.627
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – ElectrometerContact Drive Timing
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INOP LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Compare Avg., S.D., Min & Max values to current specifications.
PT35L
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
DISPLAYALL
DATA
Contacts ContactsDown – Time Up – Time(seconds) (seconds)
Avg. = 0.13 0.54S.D. = 0.00 0.01Min. = 0.13 0.53Max. = 0.13 0.55
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–101
Diagnostics
Cartridge Handling
Cartridge Handling
3–102 VITRO
You can use these performance tests to verify or assess the operation of the cartridge handling system and those mechanisms that control it. The performance tests check the operation of the cartridge plunger, bar code scanner, and cartridge rotor movement.
Three cartridge handling performance tests are available.
• Plunger Count Test—The plunger count test is for Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer use only.
• Bar Code Scanner Test—Assesses bar code integrity and scanner operation. Tests the bar code scanners that are located on the back wall of each slide cartridge load station.
• Rotor Movement Test—Verifies proper mechanical operation of the slide supply rotors.
Plunger Count Test
This test is for Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer use only.Testing the Bar Code Scanner
To test the bar code scanner:1. Touch CARTRIDGE HANDLING on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch BAR CODE SCANNER.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge Handling
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT25A
PLUNGER COUNT
BAR CODE SCANNER
ROTOR MOVEMENT
> Touch a target to select a function.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing the Bar Code Scanner
3. Place a cartridge in either cartridge load station. Using a smooth continuous motion, push the cartridge into the opening as far as it will go (its bottom will touch the load door). The bar code label must face away from you.
4. The bar code is scanned, and the data generated is sent to the screen.
NOTE: As you push the cartridge into the load station, look for the blink of the LED at the back of each cartridge load station. This indicates a good read. If you see the blink but the read does not display on the screen, there may be an unusual condition in the scheduler board communication. Call your Customer Support Representative if this occurs.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge HandlingBar Code Scanner
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT27A
> Insert test cartridge into Slide Supply 1 or Slide Supply 2.
Repitition Scanner #2Reads
Repitition Scanner #1Reads
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
2 1
Cartridge Load Station
Test Cartridge
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–103
Diagnostics
Testing the Bar Code Scanner
3–104 VITROS 250/350 C
Repetition—number of bar code scanner trials that have been attempted.
Reads—represents what is read by that bar code reader. The read should match the human readable characters that appear on the cartridge bar code label on the side of the cartridge.
If the read failed, the bar code could not be read by the scanner. Possible causes of a failed read are:
— Scanner damaged
— Label damaged
— Label missing
— Operator error
– Cartridge inserted without the bar code label facing rear of analyzer.
– Insertion technique not smooth enough.
– Cartridge inserted too fast or too slow.
5. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen when you are finished testing.
6. Touch RETURN to return to the main Cartridge Handling Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge HandlingBar Code Scanner
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT27A
> Insert test cartridge into Slide Supply 1 or Slide Supply 2. > SCANNER #1: Scans= 8 Failures= 2 SCANNER #2 Scans= 8 Failures= 2.
Repetition Scanner #2Reads
1 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 2 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 4 FAILED 5 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7 FAILED 8 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx10 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Repetition Scanner #1Reads
1 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 2 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 4 FAILED 5 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7 FAILED 8 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx10 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Testing Rotor Movement
Testing Rotor Movement
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
To test the rotor movement:
1. Touch CARTRIDGE HANDLING on the main Performance Tests screen.
2. Touch ROTOR MOVEMENT.
3. Select the slide supply by touching SLIDE SUPPLY 1 or SLIDE SUPPLY 2.
4. Touch START.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge Handling
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT25A
PLUNGER COUNT
BAR CODE SCANNER
ROTOR MOVEMENT
> Touch a target to select a function.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge Handling Rotor Movement
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT28A
SLIDE SUPPLY 1
SLIDE SUPPLY 2
> Select Slide Supply and touch START.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELPSTART
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–105
Diagnostics
Testing Rotor Movement
3–106 VITRO
5. Enter the total number of rotor movements desired at the prompt. Type the number (1 to 100), and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
— The prompt line on the screen indicates that the estimated time to complete each movement is two seconds.
— The test occurs, and the selected slide supply is reset.
— Data generated is displayed on the screen. Any rotor movement errors are reported on the line below the prompt line on the screen.
6. The prompt will ask you if the test is to be repeated.
— Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to repeat the test.
— Type “N” and press the Enter key on the keyboard to end the test.
DIAGNOSTICS – Performance Tests – Cartridge Handling Rotor Movement
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250SS1 SS2 ST INC R/C PM INC LAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PT28B
SLIDE SUPPLY 1
SLIDE SUPPLY 2
> Enter the total number of rotor movements desired (1 – 100) : 12Note: the average time per movement is approximately 2 seconds.
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENURETURN HELP
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Testing Rotor Movement
7. Press the PrtScr key to print the test results when you are finished testing.
8. Touch RETURN to return to the main Cartridge Handling Performance Tests screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Interpreting DataThe number of successful rotor movements is displayed on the screen. For instance, if twelve movements are requested and there are three failures, the screen will display, “# ROTOR MOVEMENTS COMPLETED = 9 out of 12.”
All of the desired movements should be completed without error. No error text should be displayed below the prompt line. If any of the movements fail or if there are error codes, call your Customer Support Representative for assistance in interpreting the data. Have a printout of the test results available when you call.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–107
Diagnostics
Hardware and Chemistry Information
Hardware and Chemistry Information
3–108 VITRO
To access Hardware and Chemistry Information:
1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
2. Touch HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO.
Four categories of hardware and chemistry information are available:
• Recent History Log—Displays the last 99 condition codes in chronological order. This feature also allows you to display:
— Each condition code that has appeared on the analyzer.
— The entire message for selected condition codes.
• Condition Code—Displays a more detailed description of selected error codes, possible causes, and possible solutions.
HARDWARE AND CHEMISTRY INFORMATION
Oct 09 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a TARGET.
SDMM1
RETURN HELP
RECENTHISTORY
LOG
CONDITIONCODE
DATA-LOGGERANALYSIS
SOFTWAREIDENTI-
FICATION
W2.0B
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Hardware and Chemistry Information
• Datalogger Analysis—Enables you to identify trends in specific chemistries or environmental conditions by generating information from a data logger file. You are able to sort the records by four search criteria:
— Chemistry. Sorts the datalogger file by chemistry and includes cup position, drop number, slide supply position, cartridge position, incubator position, and result.
— Incubator Position. Sorts the datalogger file by incubator position and includes chemistry, cup position, drop number, slide supply position, cartridge position, and result.
— Environmental Data. Sorts the datalogger file by temperature/humidity or by power supply voltages.
— Error Codes. Sorts the datalogger file by error codes. All of the error codes together with date, time, module number, error number, error type, severity, and condition code display for the selected file.
• Software Identification—Use this feature only when instructed by your Customer Support Representative to do so. The feature allows you to:
— Verify checksums. (File verify takes approximately five minutes.)
— Verify EEPROM and ROM versions.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–109
Diagnostics
Recent History Log
Recent History Log T
3–110 VITROS 250/350 C
o display the recent history log:
1. Touch RECENT HISTORY LOG on the main Hardware and Chemis-try Information screen.
2. To display additional condition codes, touch DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN. The last 92 codes are available for display.
NOTE: Errors that have occurred since you entered Diagnostics will not display in the recent history log.
3. Press the PrtScr key to print any of the screens you may need for review and interpretation. To print the entire recent history log, type “PRINT” and press the Enter key on the keyboard. The last 92 codes will print.
4. To display each condition code that has appeared on the analyzer, touch CONDITION CODE SUMMARY.
RECENT HISTORY LOG
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a TARGET or touch "HELP" for commands made on KEYBOARD.
SDHL1
1 Condition Code: 434 10/21/92 10:33:31 ATTENTION 37 17MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message
2 Condition Code: 434 10/21/92 10:33:31 ATTENTION 37 17MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message
3 Condition Code: 434 10/21/92 10:33:31 ATTENTION 37 17MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message
4 Condition Code: 434 10/21/92 10:33:31 ATTENTION 37 17MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message
5 Condition Code: 434 10/21/92 10:33:30 ATTENTION 37 17MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message
6 Condition Code: 1EA 10/20/92 12:24:07 ATTENTION 4 53SCHEDULER * CART HANDLING * cart with slides might unload
7 Condition Code: AE1 10/20/92 12:23:12 MALFUNCTION 102 90SLIDE SUPPLY * LOAD DOOR #2 * jam
8 Condition Code: 430 10/20/92 08:31:26 TRANSIENT 37 28MONITOR CONTROL * communications error
CONDITIONCODE
SUMMARYHELP
DISPLAYNEXT
SCREEN
COMPLETEMESSAGE
RETURN
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Diagnostics
Recent History Log
5. To display additional condition codes and occurrences, touch DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN.
6. Press the PrtScr key to print any of the screens you may need for review and interpretation. To print all condition codes that have occurrences, type “PRINT” and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
7. To display the entire message for a condition code, possible causes, and possible solutions, touch COMPLETE MESSAGE.
8. At the prompt, enter the alphanumeric condition code.
CONDITION CODE SUMMARY
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a TARGET or touch "HELP" for commands made on KEYBOARD.
SDHL2Condition
Code
RECENTHISTORY
LOGHELP
DISPLAYNEXT
SCREEN
COMPLETEMESSAGE
RETURN
OcurrencesSince 00/00/00
000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
1A11B11B21B41B51B61B71B81BB1BN1BP1BQ1BR1BS1BT
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–111
Diagnostics
Recent History Log
3–112 VITROS 250/350 C
9. Press the PrtScr key to print the screen for review or interpretation.
10. Touch RETURN to return to the main Hardware and Chemistry Information screen, or touch RETURN TO COND. CODE SUMMARY to return to the Condition Code Summary screen.
11. To reset the condition code summary to today’s date, type “RESET” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when you are at the Condition Code Summary screen. The date displayed in the Occurrences column will change to today’s date.
CONDITION CODE MESSAGE
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a TARGET.
SDCC2
RETURN TOCOND. CODE
SUMMARYHELPRETURN
1A1 Scheduler * REPORT ERROR * internal software error
The Report Error Module encountered an out of range value while reporting another error.
Possible Cause:– Software self check error.
Things to do:– Report it to the key operator.
DISPLAYNEXT
SCREEN
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Condition Code
Condition Code Yf
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
ou may also display condition code detail for multiple condition codes rom the Hardware and Chemistry Information screen.
To display detailed descriptions of selected error codes, including possible causes and solutions:
1. Touch CONDITION CODE on the Hardware and Chemistry Infor-mation screen.
2. Enter the alphanumeric condition code.
3. Touch ENTER NEW CONDITION CODE to enter additional condition codes.
4. Press the PrtScr key to print any of the screens you may need for review and interpretation.
5. Touch RETURN to return to the main Hardware and Chemistry Information screen.
CONDITION CODE MESSAGE
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a TARGET.
SDCC2
ENTER NEWCONDITION
CODEHELPRETURN
434 MONITOR CONTROL * invalid message
A valid message is not displayed on the Monitor.
Possible Cause:– Computer memory malfunction.
Things to do:– Touch "RETURN" until the main menu is displayed. Touch "SHUTDOWN
ANALYZER". Typewrite "Y" and press "ENTER". When the prompt is displayed, actuate the "PRGM LOAD/RESET"SWITCH to operate ComputerSystem Checks.
– If this code occurs again, record the "Code" and the module/errornumbers displayed on the error log screen, then obtain help fromyour Customer Support Representative.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–113
Diagnostics
Datalogger Analysis
Datalogger Analysis T
3–114 VITROS 250/350 C
he datalogger logs significant events that occur on the analyzer into a log file. The datalogger turns on automatically when you start up or reboot the analyzer.
There are a maximum of ten log files available. Each time the datalogger is turned on, data is written into a new file. Entry into that file is terminated when you turn off the datalogger. When log file ten is closed, log file one will be written to (erasing the data currently in that file) the next time you turn on the datalogger.
Depending on the nature of the condition you are investigating, you can search datalogger files by chemistry, incubator position, environmental data, and error codes. This will aid you in determining the possible cause of a system-related or intermittent condition.
NOTE: It is not possible to do a datalogger analysis on a file that is currently open. You must close the file first.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Closing the Current Datalogger File
Closing the Current Datalogger File
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
To close the datalogger file that is currently open:
1. Touch OPTIONS on the Main Menu.
2. Enter the operator access code, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
3. Touch SPECIAL SERVICES in the System Services column.
4. Touch DATA LOGGER.
Jul 15 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP00B
> Touch a target to select an option.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONSSystem Services
SUBSYSTEMCONTROL
ANALYZERCONFIG
SPECIALSERVICES
REPORTCONTROL
WORKLOAD& USAGEREPORTS
Disk Srvcs
LOADCAL
DISKETTE
DISKFILE
SERVICES
BACKUP/RESTOREDISKETTE
Cal Data
CALPARAMS
CALIBRATORSAVs
CALIBRATORLOT #
SELECTION
Test Data
TEST/FLUID
CONFIG
DILUENTDATA
COEF&
LIMITS
ADDITIONALTESTS
CONFIG
PRINTCONFIGREPORT
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP00F
> Touch a target to select a category.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONS – Special Services
Categories
DATE AND
TIME
DATA LOGGER
U.S. PATENT
INFO
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–115
Diagnostics
Closing the Current Datalogger File
3–116 VITROS 250/350 C
5. Touch DATALOGGING ON/OFF to OFF.
6. Touch DATALOGGING ON/OFF to ON.
NOTE: Turning the datalogger file off and then on closes the existing file to make it available for analysis. A new file is opened.
7. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
EXCL CONFENTRIESON OFF
DECIPHER
SAMPLE IDs
ENCRYPTSAMPLE IDON OFF
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP10A
> Touch a target to change data logging control or to select a function.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONS – Data Logging Control
DATA LOGGINGON OFF
CHANGEENVIRONMENT
INTERVAL
Function
Environment Log Time Interval: 30 min
Newest Data Log File Name: LOG02
Oldest Data Log File Name: LOG03
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP10B
> Touch a target to change data logging control or to select a function.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONS – Data Logging Control
CHANGEENVIRONMENT
INTERVAL
Function
Environment Log Time Interval: 30 min
Newest Data Log File Name: LOG02
Oldest Data Log File Name: LOG03
TRANSFERLOGGED DATATO DISKETTE
DELETE ALLLOGGEDINITIAL
DATALOGGINGON OFF
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files
Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
To access and search datalogger files:
1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
2. Touch HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO.
3. Touch DATALOGGER ANALYSIS.
4. Touch SELECT DATALOG FILE.
5. Touch SELECT FILE FOR SORT.
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
SDDU1
> Touch a TARGET.
HELPRETURN
DATALOG UTILITY – Main Menu
SELECT DATALOG FILE
SELECT SEARCH CRITERIA
W2.0B
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
SDDU3
> Touch a TARGET.
DATALOG UTILITY – File Directory
Filename Length Create Access Modify -------- ------ ------ ------ ------LOG01 154563 10/01/92 13:59:30 10/16/92 14:11:31 10/16/92 14:11:31LOG02 101792 10/01/92 13:59:31 10/21/92 10:27:02 10/21/92 10:27:02LOG03 63974 10/01/92 13:59:31 10/21/92 10:28:17 10/21/92 10:28:17LOG04 466388 10/01/92 13:59:32 10/05/92 09:41:46 10/05/92 09:41:46LOG05 210526 10/01/92 13:59:32 10/07/92 13:51:52 10/07/92 13:51:52LOG06 244676 10/01/92 13:59:33 10/13/92 10:02:00 10/13/92 10:02:00LOG07 67070 10/01/92 13:59:33 10/13/92 10:28:20 10/13/92 10:28:20LOG08 83237 10/01/92 13:59:34 10/14/92 14:08:52 10/14/92 14:08:52LOG09 205597 10/01/92 13:59:34 10/16/92 10:55:06 10/16/92 10:55:06LOG10 118268 10/01/92 13:59:34 10/16/92 12:35:45 10/16/92 12:35:45LOG11 0 10/01/92 13:59:35 10/01/92 13:59:35 10/01/92 13:59:35LOG12 0 10/01/92 13:59:35 10/01/92 13:59:35 10/01/92 13:59:35
Datalog file to sort: Not defined
DISPLAYNEXT
SCREEN
SELECTFILE FOR
SORTRETURN HELP
SCREEN 1
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–117
Diagnostics
Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files
3–118 VITROS 250/350 C
6. Type the filename that contains the records of interest (for example, log01), and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
7. Touch RETURN.
8. Touch SELECT SEARCH CRITERIA.
You are able to sort the records by the four search criteria shown on the screen.
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
SDDU1
> Touch a TARGET.
HELPRETURN
DATALOG UTILITY – Main Menu
SELECT DATALOG FILE
SELECT SEARCH CRITERIA
W2.0B
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
SDDU4
> Touch a TARGET.
HELPRETURN
DATALOG UTILITY – Select Criteria
CHEMISTRY ENVIRONMENTALDATA
INCUBATORPOSITION ERROR CODES
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files
Search Criteria—Chemistry
To sort the datalogger file by chemistry:
1. Touch CHEMISTRY on the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.
2. Select the chemistries:
— To select a single chemistry, touch the desired target.
— To select multiple chemistries, touch the desired targets.
— To set a panel of chemistries, touch SET PANEL.
– Enter the number of the panel (1 to 7), and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
– Type the name of the panel, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
– Touch all test targets to be included in the panel.
– Touch SET PANEL again to save the panel.
– To select additional tests and panels, touch DISPLAY NEXT SCREEN.
During future datalogger analysis activities, it will only be necessary to select the desired active panel by touching the panel name. Chemistries selected previously for the panel will be highlighted.
3. Touch DISPLAY DATA.
Aug 09 04
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
SDDU2
> Touch a TARGET.
DATALOG UTILITY – Chemistry Selection
NA+ GLU TP Bu AST ALKP TRIG Mg PROT
K+ BUN ALB Bc ALT GGT CHOL AMON LAC
Cl – CREA Ca TBIL LDH AMYL dHDL THEO DGXN
ECO2 URIC PHOS CKMB CK LIPA Fe TIBC ALC
SET PANEL
DISPLAYNEXT
SCREENRETURN HELPDISPLAY
DATADELETEPANEL
Datalog file to sort: LOG01
SCREEN 1
1 2
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–119
Diagnostics
Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files
3–120 VITROS 250/350 C
4. Touch PRINT DATA to print the data display.
5. Touch RETURN to return to the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.
DATALOG UTILITY – Data Display
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
> Touch a TARGET.
SDDU5
DISPLAYPREVIOUSSCREEN
RETURN HELPPRINTDATA
Screen #: 1
DATE TIME CHEM POS DROP NUM SS POS CART POS INC POS RESULT ----- ---- ------ --- ------------ -------- ----------- --------- --------10/16/92 13:08:47 CREA 1 1 45 48 7 ******10/16/92 13:09:00 CREA 1 2 45 47 9 ******10/16/92 13:09:15 TP 1 3 5 50 11 ******10/16/92 13:09:29 TP 1 4 5 49 13 ******10/16/92 13:09:43 ALB 1 5 2 50 15 ******10/16/92 13:09:58 ABL 1 6 2 50 17 ******10/16/92 13:10:19 LIPA 1 7 8 49 20 ******10/16/92 13:10:33 LIPA 1 8 8 48 22 ******10/16/92 13:10:55 LDH 1 1 47 49 1 ******10/16/92 13:11:10 LDH 1 2 47 48 3 ******10/16/92 13:11:24 ALT 1 3 52 48 5 ******10/16/92 13:11:45 ALT 1 4 52 47 8 ******10/16/92 13:12:00 AST 1 5 36 48 10 ******10/16/92 13:12:14 AST 1 6 36 47 12 ******
DISPLAYNEXT
SCREEN
W2.0B
SAMPLING
OFFON
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files
Search Criteria—Incubator PositionTo sort the datalogger file by incubator position:
1. Touch INCUBATOR POSITION on the Datalog Utility Select Crite-ria screen.
2. Enter the incubator nest position number (1 to 23) where you suspect an unusual condition, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
3. Touch PRINT DATA to print the data display.
4. Touch RETURN to return to the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.
DATALOG UTILITY – Data Display
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
> Touch a TARGET.
SDDU5
RETURN HELPPRINTDATA
Screen #: 1
DATE TIME CHEM POS DROP NUM SS POS CART POS INC POS RESULT ----- ---- ------ --- ------------ -------- ----------- --------- --------10/16/92 13:16:25 CREA 5 1 45 44 23 ******10/16/92 13:25:01 CKMB 2 1 49 46 23 ******10/16/92 13:33:35 AMON 7 2 44 47 23 ******
W2.0B
SAMPLING
OFFON
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–121
Diagnostics
Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files
3–122 VITROS 250/350 C
Search Criteria—Environmental Data
To sort the datalogger file by environmental data:
1. Touch ENVIRONMENTAL DATA on the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.
2. To view temperature and humidity data, touch TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY.
3. Touch PRINT DATA to print the data display.
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
SDDU6
> Touch a TARGET.
HELPRETURN
DATALOG UTILITY – Environmental Data
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY
POWER SUPPLYVOLTAGES
W2.0B
DATALOG UTILITY – Data Display
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
> Touch a TARGET.
SDDU5
RETURN HELPPRINTDATA
Screen #: 1 W2.0B
SAMPLING
OFFON
TEMP 1 TEMP 2 RELATIVE HUMIDITY DATE TIME-------- -------- ------------------------ -------- -------
Incubator 37.03 36.94 10/16/92 13:11:29Slide Supply 1 22.19 42.83 10/16/92 13:11:29Slide Supply 2 21.95 29.00 10/16/92 13:11:29Ambient 24.78 10/16/92 13:11:29
Incubator 37.06 36.98 10/16/92 13:41:24Slide Supply 1 22.03 42.59 10/16/92 13:41:24Slide Supply 2 22.27 29.00 10/16/92 13:41:24Ambient 24.78 10/16/92 13:41:24
Incubator 37.05 36.94 10/16/92 14:11:19Slide Supply 1 21.80 42.59 10/16/92 14:11:19Slide Supply 2 21.93 29.00 10/16/92 14:11:19Ambient 24.78 10/16/92 14:11:19
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Diagnostics
Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files
4. Touch RETURN to return to the Datalog Utility Environmental Data screen.
5. To view power supply voltage data, touch POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGES.
6. Touch PRINT DATA to print the data display for power supply voltages.
7. Touch RETURN to return to the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.
DATALOG UTILITY – Data Display
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
> Touch a TARGET.
SDDU5
RETURN HELPPRINTDATA
Screen #: 1 W2.0B
SAMPLING
OFFON
POWER SUPPLIES 5V 12V –12V 15V –15V 24VM 24VFV--- ---- ----- ---- ----- ------ -------
Slide Supply/Cart. LoadIncubator/Radial WashRef. Mtrng/Slide TransportSample HandlerSample MeteringElectrometerReflectometerSlide Supply/Cart. LoadIncubator/Radial WashRef. Mtrng/Slide TransportSample HandlerSample MeteringElectrometerReflectometer
DISPLAYNEXT
SCREEN
DISPLAYPREVIOUS SCREEN
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–123
Diagnostics
Accessing and Searching Datalogger Files
3–124 VITROS 250/350 C
Search Criteria—Error CodesTo sort the datalogger file by error codes:
1. Touch ERROR CODES on the Datalog Utility Select Criteria screen.
2. Touch PRINT DATA to print the error codes data display.
Interpreting DataYou will need assistance to interpret the data. Call your Customer Support Representative and have screen printouts available.
DATALOG UTILITY – Data Display
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
> Touch a TARGET.
SDDU5
RETURN HELPPRINTDATA
Screen #: 1 W2.0B
SAMPLING
OFFON
DISPLAYNEXT
SCREEN
DISPLAYPREVIOUS SCREEN
DATE TIME MOD NUM ERROR NUM ERR TYPE SEVERITY COND CODE------ ------ ------------ --------------- ---------- ---------- --------------
10/16/9212:44:32 51 52 OPER. MALFUN 82910/16/9212:54:21 63 5 OPER. TRANST 4J110/16/9212:54:55 74 2 OPER. ACTION 57810/16/9212:54:55 74 2 OPER. ACTION 57810/16/9212:54:55 74 2 OPER. ACTION 57810/16/9213:04:03 8 49 OPER. ATTENT 2D2 *10/16/9213:07:02 131 43 OPER. MALFUN EA *10/16/9213:12:43 44 20 OPER. ATTENT 54 *10/16/9213:17:45 63 5 OPER. TRANST 4J110/16/9213:17:53 131 43 OPER. MALFUN EA *10/16/9213:18:15 131 43 OPER. MALFUN EA *10/16/9213:20:15 82 5 OPER. ACTION 6M *10/16/9213:20:28 82 5 OPER. ACTION 6M3 *10/16/9213:23:27 44 20 OPER. ATTENT 54 *
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Diagnostics
Software Identification
Software Identification UC
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
se this diagnostics feature only when instructed to do so by your ustomer Support Representative.
To access software identification:
1. Touch SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION on the Hardware and Chem-istry Information screen.
2. Touch FILE VERIFY to verify checksums.
NOTE: File Verify takes approximately five minutes.
3. Touch PRINT DATA to send the information to the printer.
SDSW1
> Touch a target. Note: File Verify requires 5 minutes.
HELPRETURN
SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
FILEVERIFY
SCHEDULERSOFTWARE
ID
W2.0B
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a TARGET.
RETURN HELPPRINTDATA
DISPLAYNEXT
SCREEN
DISPLAYPREVIOUS SCREEN
FILENAME CHECKSUM CALCULATED CHECKSUM FILE STATUS------------- --------------- --------------------------------- ----------------:F0:adbbld..286 54940 54940 GOOD:F0:adml_flow 33854 33854 GOOD:F0:adml_sub 61998 61998 GOOD:F0:adml_text 35709 35709 GOOD:F0:bdbbld.286 1823 1823 GOOD:F0:both 35553 35553 GOOD:F0:cdbbld.286 17298 17298 GOOD:F0:comm 34497 34497 GOOD:F0:comm.bin 4038 34497 GOOD:F0:config.m 466 466 GOOD:F0:control.m 61760 61760 GOOD:F0:cpdbld.286 48339 48339 GOOD:F0:cscpgm 48861 48861 GOOD:F0:cscram.m 28996 28996 GOOD
FILE VERIFICATION
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SDSW2 SCREEN 1 W2.0B
SAMPLING
OFFON
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 3–125
Diagnostics
Software Identification
3–126 VITROS 250/350 C
4. Touch RETURN to return to the Software Identification screen.
5. Touch SCHEDULER SOFTWARE ID to verify EEPROM and ROM versions and applicable processors.
6. Touch PRINT DATA to send the information to the printer.
7. Touch RETURN to exit.
> Touch a TARGET.
RETURN HELPPRINTDATA
DISPLAYNEXT
SCREEN
DISPLAYPREVIOUS SCREEN
PROCESSOR FILENAME EEPROM VERSION ROM VERSION----------------- --------------- --------------------- ------------------
Not Used :F0:UNUSED V1.1A V1.0AMASTER :F0:MASTER V1.1C V1.00SCHEDULER–COMM :F0:COMM.BIN V1.1A V3.5DSCHEDULER–MAIN :F0:MAIN.BIN V1.1A V3.5D6811–01 :F0:CT_MIC.BIN V5.0B V4.0A6811–02 :F0:SSE_MIC.BIN V3.0F V4.0A6811–03 :F0:INC_MIC.BIN V4.3A V4.0A6811–04 :F0:IR_MIC.BIN V1.4C V4.0A6811–05 :F0:ST_MIC.BIN V4.1C V4.0A6811–06 :F0:RM_MIC.BIN V4.1B V4.0A6811–07 :F0:TRAY_MIC.BIN V1.0H V4.0A6811–08 :F0:TIP_MIC.BIN V1.0H V4.0A6811–09 :F0:SM_MIC.BIN V4.1Q V4.0A6811–10 :F0:REF_MIC.BIN V3.2B V1.8A
SCHEDULER SOFTWARE IDENTIFICATION
Oct 21 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SDSW3 SCREEN 1 W2.0B
SAMPLING
OFFON
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
4 Environmental Monitoring
Environmental Monitoring
Version 2.0 VITRO
You can use this diagnostic feature to review the status of the environmentally controlled stations and the power supplies. After you touch the ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING target on the Main Menu, the following screen is displayed.
NOTES: When you first turn on the analyzer, it takes time for environmental monitoring to reach the required limits. You may see flashing asterisks next to the temperature and humidity readings. The readings may display as zeros. When the required limits are reached, the asterisks will disappear and the correct temperature and humidity readings will display.
Power monitoring, a diagnostics tool for Field Engineers, may be turned on or off by the Field Engineer in the Options subsystem.
The reflectometer temperature will be zero unless power monitoring is turned on.
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Station and voltage readings are updated on a ten-second interval.
NOTE: Flashing * indicates station or voltage readings not within spec.
ME15A
HELPRETURN
Temperature 1 Temperature 2 Relative Humidity
Incubator 35.86* 36.37*
Slide Supply 1 25.51* 33.40
Slide Supply 2 22.19 29.00*
Reflectometer 69.00
Ambient 22.85
POWER SUPPLY 5V 12V –12V 15V –15V 24VM 24VF
Slide Supply/Cart.Load 5.15 11.77 –12.20 14.30 –16.62* 23.86 23.50
Incubator/Immuno-Rate 5.15 11.68 –12.10 13.20* –14.91 24.05 23.86
Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport 5.15 11.77 –12.05 13.20* –14.86 23.86 23.50
Sample Handler 0.00* 0.00* 0.00*
Sample Metering 5.00 23.86 23.86
Electrometer 4.96 14.97 23.83
Reflectometer 5.03
REMOTE ENABLED
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 4–1
Environmental Monitoring
Environmental Error Conditions
Environmental Error Conditions
4–2 VITRO
Environmental error conditions are brought to your attention through error messages posted on the status console of the monitor. The error messages will define what portion of the analyzer is experiencing the error and give more detail on what the error is. This section contains some suggestions that may solve the environmental errors.
Incubator Temperature Control
1. Lift the top right analyzer cover.2. Make sure that the incubator cover is seated properly.
3. Open the right front door of the analyzer.
Incubator Cover
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Environmental Monitoring
Incubator Temperature Control
4. Make sure that the air filter is clean and allows adequate airflow.
5. Check the vents of the analyzer to see if they are obstructed. Vents are located at the lower portion of the two front door panels and at the back right panel.
6. Close the top cover and the right front door of the analyzer.
Air Filter
Vents
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 4–3
Environmental Monitoring
Incubator Temperature Control
4–4 VITROS 250/350 C
7. Touch RETURN until the Main Menu is displayed.
8. Touch ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING.
9. Look at the incubator temperature to see if a flashing asterisk is displayed next to it.
MAIN MENU
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
SCO3A
SAMPLE PROGRAMMING
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
CARTRIDGE HANDLING
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
QUALITY CONTROL
CALIBRATION PROGRAMMING
DIAGNOSTICS
REVIEW RESULTS
OPTIONS
EXIT TO BOOTMENU
HELPSHUTDOWN ANALYZER
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Station and voltage readings are updated on a ten-second interval.
NOTE: Flashing * indicates station or voltage readings not within spec.
ME15A
HELPRETURN
Temperature 1 Temperature 2 Relative Humidity
Incubator 35.86* 36.37*
Slide Supply 1 25.51* 33.40
Slide Supply 2 22.19 29.00*
Reflectometer 69.00
Ambient 22.85
POWER SUPPLY 5V 12V –12V 15V –15V 24VM 24VF
Slide Supply/Cart.Load 5.15 11.77 –12.20 14.30 –16.62* 23.86 23.50
Incubator/Immuno-Rate 5.15 11.68 –12.10 13.20* –14.91 24.05 23.86
Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport 5.15 11.77 –12.05 13.20* –14.86 23.86 23.50
Sample Handler 0.00* 0.00* 0.00*
Sample Metering 5.00 23.86 23.86
Electrometer 4.96 14.97 23.83
Reflectometer 5.03
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Environmental Monitoring
Incubator Temperature Control
NOTE: If you performed any of the corrective action steps suggested (for example, if you replaced the air filter), it may take up to five minutes for the incubator temperature control to reach the required limits.
If the asterisk (*) is still flashing after five minutes, ask your key operator for assistance or call your Customer Support Representative.
If no asterisk is displayed next to the incubator temperature:
— Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
— Touch INITIALIZE.
— Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
— Continue normal analyzer operation.
RELEV ERR
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ER01A
DOWN INITIALIZEUP
SHUTDOWN
MALFUNCTION
ACTION
ATTENTION
TRANSIENT
8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open
11:00:18 Code: 3S6 38 141
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar.
8/17/93 MALFUNCTIONSCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 4–5
Environmental Monitoring
Slide Supply Temperature Control
Slide Supply Temperature Control
4–6 VITROS 250/350 C
1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
2. Open the right front door of the analyzer.
3. Make sure that:
— The cartridge load doors are closed.
— The cartridge trap door is closed.
— The cartridge unload doors are closed. Remove the cartridge disposal box to gain easy access to the cartridge discard chute. Reach up into the cartridge discard chute and locate both car-tridge unload doors. Feel to make sure both doors are closed.
Cartridge Trap Door
Cartridge Discard Chute
Cartridge Disposal Box
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Environmental Monitoring
Slide Supply Temperature Control
— The carriers for the humidity control packs and desiccant packs are in the correct locations and are latched into place against the bottom of the slide supplies.
4. Close the right top cover and the right front door of the analyzer.
5. Touch RETURN until the Main Menu is displayed.
Salt Pad and DesiccantPack Carriers
MAIN MENU
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
SCO3A
SAMPLE PROGRAMMING
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
CARTRIDGE HANDLING
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
QUALITY CONTROL
CALIBRATION PROGRAMMING
DIAGNOSTICS
REVIEW RESULTS
OPTIONS
EXIT TO BOOTMENU
HELPSHUTDOWN ANALYZER
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 4–7
Environmental Monitoring
Slide Supply Temperature Control
4–8 VITROS 250/350 C
6. Touch ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING.
7. Look at the slide supply temperature to see if a flashing asterisk is displayed next to it.
NOTE: If you performed any of the corrective action steps required (for example, if you relatched the carrier for the humidity control packs), it may take up to five minutes for the slide supply temperature control to reach the required limits.
If the asterisk (*) is still flashing after five minutes, ask your key operator for assistance or call your your Customer Support Representative.
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Station and voltage readings are updated on a ten-second interval.
NOTE: Flashing * indicates station or voltage readings not within spec.
ME15A
HELPRETURN
Temperature 1 Temperature 2 Relative Humidity
Incubator 35.86* 36.37*
Slide Supply 1 25.51* 33.40
Slide Supply 2 22.19 29.00*
Reflectometer 69.00
Ambient 22.85
POWER SUPPLY 5V 12V –12V 15V –15V 24VM 24VF
Slide Supply/Cart.Load 5.15 11.77 –12.20 14.30 –16.62* 23.86 23.50
Incubator/Immuno-Rate 5.15 11.68 –12.10 13.20* –14.91 24.05 23.86
Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport 5.15 11.77 –12.05 13.20* –14.86 23.86 23.50
Sample Handler 0.00* 0.00* 0.00*
Sample Metering 5.00 23.86 23.86
Electrometer 4.96 14.97 23.83
Reflectometer 5.03
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Environmental Monitoring
Slide Supply Temperature Control
If no asterisk is displayed next to the incubator temperature:
— Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
— Touch INITIALIZE.
— Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
— Continue normal analyzer operation.
RELEV ERR
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ER01A
DOWN INITIALIZEUP
SHUTDOWN
MALFUNCTION
ACTION
ATTENTION
TRANSIENT
8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open
11:00:18 Code: 3S6 38 141
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar.
8/17/93 MALFUNCTIONSCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 4–9
Environmental Monitoring
Slide Supply Humidity Control
Slide Supply Humidity Control
4–10 VITROS 250/350 C
1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
2. Open the right front door of the analyzer.
3. Make sure that:
— The cartridge load doors are closed.
— The cartridge trap door is closed.
— The cartridge unload doors are closed. Remove the cartridge disposal box to gain easy access to the cartridge discard chute. Reach up into the cartridge discard chute and locate both car-tridge unload doors. Feel to make sure both doors are closed.
Cartridge Trap Door
Cartridge Discard Chute
Cartridge Disposal Box
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Environmental Monitoring
Slide Supply Humidity Control
— The carriers for the humidity control packs and desiccant packs are in the correct locations and are latched into place against the bottom of the slide supplies.
4. Touch RETURN until the Main Menu is displayed.
5. Touch ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING.
Salt Pad and DesiccantPack Carriers
MAIN MENU
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
SCO3A
SAMPLE PROGRAMMING
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
CARTRIDGE HANDLING
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
QUALITY CONTROL
CALIBRATION PROGRAMMING
DIAGNOSTICS
REVIEW RESULTS
OPTIONS
EXIT TO BOOTMENU
HELPSHUTDOWN ANALYZER
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 4–11
Environmental Monitoring
Slide Supply Humidity Control
4–12 VITROS 250/350 C
6. Look at the slide supply relative humidity to see if a flashing asterisk is displayed next to it.
NOTE: If you performed any of the corrective action steps required (for example, if you relatched the carrier for the humidity control packs), it may take up to five minutes for the slide supply temperature control to reach the required limits.
If no asterisk is displayed next to either slide supply relative humidity:
— Close the top right cover and the right front door of the ana-lyzer.
— Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Station and voltage readings are updated on a ten-second interval.
NOTE: Flashing * indicates station or voltage readings not within spec.
ME15A
HELPRETURN
Temperature 1 Temperature 2 Relative Humidity
Incubator 35.86* 36.37*
Slide Supply 1 25.51* 33.40
Slide Supply 2 22.19 29.00*
Reflectometer 69.00
Ambient 22.85
POWER SUPPLY 5V 12V –12V 15V –15V 24VM 24VF
Slide Supply/Cart.Load 5.15 11.77 –12.20 14.30 –16.62* 23.86 23.50
Incubator/Immuno-Rate 5.15 11.68 –12.10 13.20* –14.91 24.05 23.86
Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport 5.15 11.77 –12.05 13.20* –14.86 23.86 23.50
Sample Handler 0.00* 0.00* 0.00*
Sample Metering 5.00 23.86 23.86
Electrometer 4.96 14.97 23.83
Reflectometer 5.03
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Environmental Monitoring
Slide Supply Humidity Control
— Touch INITIALIZE.
— Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
— Continue normal analyzer operation.
If the asterisk (*) is still flashing after five minutes, make sure testing is complete and sampling is off.
— Remove the carrier for the affected slide supply by pulling down the handle and pulling the carrier straight out of the analyzer.
Pull down, then out
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 4–13
Environmental Monitoring
Slide Supply Humidity Control
4–14 VITROS 250/350 C
— Discard the old packs.
— Load the new packs for the affected slide supply. Humidity control packs are required for Slide Supply 1 (left side). Desic-cant packs are required for Slide Supply 2 (right side).
NOTE: Humidity control packs have no expiration date. They should be slightly moist. Do not use them if they are extremely wet or completely dry. There is a blue indicator in each desiccant pack wrapper that ensures the desiccant packs are good; the blue indicator turns pink if the desiccant packs are expired.
— Return the carrier to the slide supply in the analyzer. Push the carrier straight into the analyzer. Push up on the handle to latch it against the bottom of the slide supply.
IMPORTANT: Do not interchange the carriers when you reinsert them.
— Close the top right cover and the right front door of the ana-lyzer.
Slide Supply 2 –Desiccant packs
Slide Supply 1 –Magnesium-Chloride Salt Pads
Push in, then up
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Environmental Monitoring
Voltage Readings
— Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
— Touch INITIALIZE.
— Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
— Continue normal analyzer operation.
7. If the condition recurs, ask your key operator for assistance or call your Customer Support Representative.
Voltage Readings
If a flashing asterisk (*) is displayed next to any of the voltage readings, the reading is not within specifications. Call your your Customer Support Representative for assistance.NOTE: Power monitoring is always off at reboot or power up. Turn on power monitoring in the Options subsystem.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 4–15
Environmental Monitoring
Voltage Readings
4–16 VITROS 250/350 C
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.05 Troubleshooting
Self-Diagnostic Features
Error Conditions Ti
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
he analyzer contains numerous sensors and other devices that monitor nstrument performance. Also, each slide is monitored closely as it progresses through the various stations in the analyzer. When deviations from normal operation are discovered by any of the software modules with the control program, the condition is reported to the “error reporter” software module. The error reporter module sends an error indication to the status console on the monitor or to the printer when the power goes down. An error is defined as any deviation from acceptable performance.
Severity Levels Tm
he definition of “error” includes unusual hardware conditions, omentary communication difficulties in the computer system, out-of-slide conditions, or a sample outside the analyzer’s spline range. A severity level is assigned to each error condition to convey the severity of the condition and to indicate the analyzer’s response to the error. Severity indicators are displayed on line one of the status console when an error occurs.
The number preceding a severity indicator is the total number of errors that have occurred in that severity level since you last examined the error log. Two question marks (??) instead of a number indicate that the number exceeds 92. A description of the five severity levels follows, from the least severe to the most severe.
Error Information SAMPLING Target
Instrument State
Operating Status Date, Time, Software Version, Analyzer Name
Jul 15 92
14:13:12VX.XX**250
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
01- SHUTDOWN 01-MALFUNCTION 01-ACTION 01-ATTENTION
READY
REMOTE ENABLEDn Status
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–1
Troubleshooting
Severity Levels
5–2 VITROS 250/350 C
TransientTransient severity level indicates error conditions that are temporary system conditions and do not normally affect analyzer operation. Transient errors are not reported on the status console because they do not require corrective action. They are, however, logged in a history file on the fixed disk and can be reviewed through the error log screen.
AttentionAttention severity level indicates error conditions that will eventually affect analyzer operation if left uncorrected. Examples of attention errors are low slide conditions and a printer that is off-line. Attention errors are reported on the status console; however, they are not logged in the history file on the fixed disk because they will progress to a higher severity level if not corrected.
ActionAction severity level indicates error conditions that prevent the execution of some but not all operator requests. As implied by its name, immediate operator intervention is suggested to correct the condition. Examples of action errors are out-of-slide conditions or an unsuccessful calibration. Action errors are reported on the status console with an audible alert consisting of a single, long, low tone.
MalfunctionA malfunction is an error condition that prevents the continued operation of one or more of the analyzer components (sample metering, incubator, tip transport, environmental monitoring). If possible, the processing of the slides currently in the incubator will be completed before the incubator is deactivated by the analyzer software. For example, if the reference arm fails to arrive at the tip-locator to meter a potentiometric slide, no more slides will be dispensed. Yet, those slides already in the incubator could be completed. However, if one of the incubator eject blades is stuck in the incubator disk so that the disk cannot turn, the incubator will be deactivated and no more slides will be processed. This method of selective deactivation minimizes the loss of valid test results while preventing damage to the analyzer components. Malfunction errors are reported on the status console accompanied by an audible alert consisting of a single, long, low tone.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Error Log Screen
ShutdownA shutdown is an error condition that is of sufficient severity to warrant reloading the control program or resetting the analyzer. Shutdown errors usually indicate an unusual condition in the control program in random access memory or an extreme condition on the fixed disk.
IMPORTANT: The shutdown severity level is usually an instruction to the operator; the analyzer does not turn itself off.
Only conditions in the analyzer’s electrical system or the line voltage can result in an automatic shutdown. However, the Shutdown indicator will be cleared from the status console only after you reset the analyzer. Shutdown errors are reported on the status console (except in rare instances of automatic shutdowns) and are accompanied by an audible alert consisting of a combination of high and low tones.
Error Log Screen
When a severity level indicator is displayed on the status console, you can view the error by touching the status console. This will cause the error log for the displayed severity level to appear on the unit monitor. If more than one severity level is displayed, touching the status console will display the error log for the highest severity level. The error log screen shows a list of the last eight errors for a given severity level. The most recent error appears at the top of the list and will be backlit by the highlight bar. When a new error is added to the list, the eighth error is erased. Although this error is no longer displayed on the screen, it is still retrievable from the Error History Log contained on the fixed disk (except for Attention errors; they are not recorded on the fixed disk).If there are no errors displayed on the status console, touching the status console will cause the malfunction error log screen to appear on the monitor. Once on the malfunction log screen, you can access any of the other severity levels by touching the severity level target located at the right margin of the error log screen. This is useful when you need to access the error logs but no errors are displayed on the status console. When trying to resolve an analyzer condition, it may be necessary to move back and forth between the error screens and the operating software screens.
Finally, when viewing an error log screen and a new error is displayed on the status console, DO NOT touch the status console to view the new error. This action will cause a message on line three of the status console and an audible alert, consisting of a single long tone. The message is displayed for only a few seconds and says “Touch RETURN to exit displayed errors.” Touching RETURN will exit you from the error log screen. You can now touch the status console to display the error log screen for this latest error. An alternative is to simply touch the severity level target that corresponds to the new error. This also displays the latest error on the monitor.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–3
Troubleshooting
Error Log Screen
5–4 VITROS 250/350 C
An error log screen is illustrated below, followed by explanations.
Date/TimeThis is the date and time that the error was logged. This information is useful when more than one error has occurred. The error posted first is most often the cause of the condition. Following the help text for the first error code could save time in getting the analyzer back into operation. Date and time are also useful when matching an error code to a result printed on a lab report. You can obtain more information about the flagged result by locating the error code that most closely matches the date and time the lab report was printed. Following the help text for this error can help you get the correct reporting result.
Condition CodeEach error condition is assigned a three-character code. The first letter of the condition code indicates the subsystem that posted the error. For example, G31 indicates an incubator error because G = incubator. There is a label on the underside of the top right analyzer cover. This label depicts the letter designation for each subsystem and its location in the analyzer.
RELEV ERR
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ER01A
DOWN INITIALIZEUP
SHUTDOWN
MALFUNCTION
ACTION
ATTENTION
TRANSIENT
8/17/93 11:00:30 Code: 3S7 MALFUNCTION 38 142SCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * interlock open
11:00:18 Code: 3S6 38 141
Apr 24 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> TouchUP or DOWN to move highlight bar.
8/17/93 MALFUNCTIONSCHEDULER * ENVIRONMENT TASK * main cover interlock open
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Error Log Screen
This error condition code is also linked to the troubleshooting Help screens. Each condition code calls up a unique Help screen. The troubleshooting Help screens used with the line drawing label will assist you in your troubleshooting efforts. (For more information on Help screens and the line drawing label, see “Troubleshooting Help Screens” in this chapter.)
The error condition code is also helpful if you request assistance from your Customer Support Representative to correct an error condition.
Severity LevelThe associated severity level is displayed following the condition code.
Module/Error NumberEach error condition is assigned a unique module/error number. This is often referred to as the module/error pair. These numbers may be required when requesting assistance from your Customer Support Representative to correct an error condition.
Error MessageThe error message is composed of two or three parts separated by asterisks. The first part of the message identifies the module that is the source of the problem or the module that is reporting the problem. The second part of the message identifies the location within the module. (This error message component may be omitted from some messages if location cannot be identified or is not applicable.) The final error message component describes the problem. (Messages for prediction error conditions are preceded by the same two-letter code that is printed on the laboratory report. This code is provided so that you can correlate the error message with the printed report.)
The laboratory may choose to have these error messages displayed on line one of the status console in place of the severity indicators. See “Configuring the Analyzer” in Chapter 10, “Options,” of the Operator’s Manual.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–5
Troubleshooting
Error Log Screen
5–6 VITROS 250/350 C
RETURN TargetTouching the RETURN target returns the display to the screen that was on the monitor when you touched the status console. The severity level indicator is cleared from the status console when you enter the associated error log screen for all severity levels except shutdown.
UP/DOWN TargetsYou can use these targets to move the highlight bar to the error message for which you desire more troubleshooting information. The highlight bar always rests on the first error in the list when the error log is first displayed.
INITIALIZE Target
When you touch the INITIALIZE target, the analyzer initializes only the systems that were deactivated due to a malfunction error condition. Initialization is necessary to bring the affected system back to operational status after you have performed the recommended corrective actions. If a sample is being metered when you touch the INITIALIZE target, all slides for the sample are spotted before beginning the initialization process. After it is touched, the target changes from bright inverse video to normal video until the initialization process is completed. This initialization process does not affect slides being processed by systems unaffected by the deactivation.
The INITIALIZE target is not operational if any of the analyzer’s interlocked covers are open. If you attempt to initialize with any interlocks open, an Attention error will be generated. Close the covers of the analyzer before trying to initialize.
NOTE: If you experience a malfunction error condition with the electrometer, touching the INITIALIZE target following corrective action will only initialize the mechanical operational status of the electrometer. The electrometer A/D converter recalibrates only when you exit Diagnostics and return to the normal operation, when you power down the analyzer and then power up, or when you perform a full program load/reset.
Severity Level TargetsThese are the targets located at the right margin of the error log screen. All five of the error severity levels are represented by a target. You can touch any one of these targets to display the error log screen for that severity level. The backlit target identifies the currently displayed error log.
NOTE: A transient error target is included here even though this severity level is not displayed on the status console.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Help Screens
Troubleshooting Help Screens W
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
hen you touch the HELP target on the error log screen, the monitor displays a Help screen containing troubleshooting information for the condition code highlighted on the log screen. An example of a Troubleshooting Help screen is illustrated below; a description of the important features of the screen follows.
Dec 01 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING.
OFFON
ER02A
RETURN
Condition Code Description
NEXTSCREEN
EAL SAMPLE METERING * Aspirate error
A bubble was detected while aspirating fluid
Position: 3 Track: 2
Possible Causes:– There are air bubbles in the sample fluid. – There is fluid on the sample cup PIERCEABLE CAP.– There is a leak in the metering system.
Things to do:– Pipette the air bubbles out of the sample container. – Install a new PIERCEABLE CAP.– Add more sample fluid to the container. – Process the SAMPLE METERING LEAK PERFORMANCE TEST. – Touch "INITIALIZE", and process the sample again.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–7
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Help Screens
5–8 VITROS 250/350 C
Condition Code and Error MessageThe applicable condition code and error message are shown. The first letter of the condition code indicates the subsystem that posted the error. There is a label on the underside of the top right analyzer cover. This label depicts the letter designation for each subsystem and its location in the analyzer. For example, EAL indicates a Sample Metering error.
Top View
A1 Slide Supply-Outer Ring (High % Relative Humidity Supply)A2 Slide Supply-Inner Ring (Low % Relative Humidity Supply)
E Sample MeteringD D1-Slide Transport D2-Tip Locator (part of slide transport)
F Reference MeteringG Incubator
K K1-Tray Transport K2-Tray Transport HookK3-Sample Supply K4-Container Centering UnitK5-PSID
L L1-Tip Supply L2-Mixing Cup Array SupplyL3-Diluent Supply
T Bar Code Scanners for Cartridges
D1
E
A2
Y
L1L3
K1K5
K3
L2 T
F
G
K4J
J Immuno-Rate Metering Y Electrometer
D2
A1
K2
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Help Screens
Front View
T Bar Code Scanners for Cartridges
Q Electronics (Computer Systems Checks)
H Reflectometer
N Monitor Keyboard/Touch screen (Control Unit)P Printer
Environmental Control (Slide Supply %Relative Humidity)
R
NP
H
R
T
Q
R R
L
L Line-Voltage Selector (MCB)
N
If the same code continues to occur, record the condition code and the module/error numbers displayed on the error log screen. Then obtain assistance from your Customer Support Representative.
Error DescriptionIf appropriate, an expanded description of the error condition is provided.
Sample/Test IdentificationWhen appropriate, the tray, sample container, and test are identified to facilitate rerunning the sample affected by the error.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–9
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Help Screens
5–10 VITROS 250/350 C
Possible CausesWhen possible, one or more possible causes for the error condition are listed.
Things To DoFor most error conditions, one or more procedures are suggested for correcting the condition. When a number of items are listed, you should perform the first item, then check whether the condition has been corrected. If it has not been corrected, proceed to the next item on the list, and so forth, until you have performed all suggested procedures. The first item listed is generally the most frequent resolution for the error.
NEXT/PREVIOUS SCREEN TargetsThese targets appear at the bottom of the error log screen when there is more troubleshooting text about the condition code than can be displayed on a single screen. Touching the NEXT SCREEN target will advance ahead one screen and display additional causes and solutions. This additional information is for trained service personnel. Touching the PREVIOUS SCREEN target will back up one screen.
The NEXT SCREEN target does not appear on the screen on the last or only page of text. The PREVIOUS SCREEN target does not appear on the screen on the first or only page of text.
RETURN TargetTouching the RETURN target returns the display to the error log screen.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Troubleshooting
Error Messages for Downloaded Samples
Error Messages for Downloaded Samples I
g
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
n Sample Programming, you can display the last 24 error messages enerated for downloaded samples. Refer to Chapter 7, “Programming
Samples” in the Operator’s Manual for additional information.
Flags and Codes on Forms Printer Reports F
lags and codes appear on the laboratory report to indicate problemswith specific samples. Refer to the Operator’s Quick Guide or Operator’s Manual for a listing of these flags and codes.
Hardware Troubleshooting
Initializing the Analyzer Wa
hen you touch the INITIALIZE target on the error log screen, the nalyzer initializes only the systems that were deactivated due to an
error condition. Initialization is necessary to bring the affected system back to operational status after the recommended corrective actions have been performed.
If a sample is being metered when you touch the INITIALIZE target, all slides for the sample are spotted before initialization begins. Also, this initialization process does not affect slides being processed in systems unaffected by the deactivation. After you touch the target, the target changes from bright, inverse video to normal video until the initialization process is completed. To initialize all the mechanical parts, the analyzer must be in the ON mode.
The INITIALIZE target is not operational if any of the analyzer’s interlocked covers are open. If you attempt to initialize with any interlocks open, an Attention error will be generated. Close the covers of the analyzer before trying to initialize.
NOTE: If you experience an error condition with the electrometer, touching the INITIALIZE target following corrective action will only initialize the mechanical operational status of the electrometer. The electrometer A/D converter recalibrates only when you exit Diagnostics and return to the normal operation, when you power down the analyzer and then power up, or when you perform a full program load/reset.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–11
Troubleshooting
Loading/Resetting (Rebooting) the Analyzer Program
Loading/Resetting (Rebooting) the Analyzer Program T
5–12 VITROS 250/350 C
o load or reset the analyzer program:
1. Shut down the analyzer by touching the SHUTDOWN ANALYZER target on the Main Menu.
— If the touchscreen is not working, continue with Step 4 of this procedure.
2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted.
3. Wait until you see the message, “The analyzer has been shut down. Reset or power down is required.”
4. Turn off the analyzer’s main power switch (O or OFF). Leave the analyzer turned off for at least two minutes before turning the analyzer back on.
5. Turn on the analyzer’s main power switch (I or ON). Wait for the Main Menu to appear (approximately ten minutes).
6. Verify that the correct date and time are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. To correct the date and time, see the “Special Services” section of Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Operator’s Manual, or see the Operator’s Quick Guide.
NOTE: Make sure the date and time are correct to prevent discrepancies in storage and retrieval of calibration, slide disposal, and patient data.
7. The analyzer is now ready for normal operation.
Clearing Sample Tray Jams T
o clear jams in the sample tray area:1. Open the top left cover of the analyzer.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Sample Tray Jams
2. Move the tray transport arm manually to the left until the arm is aligned with tray track No. 1. Remove any tray that is on track No. 1.
3. Grasp the sample tray that is jammed inside the analyzer with your right hand, and depress the tray retention clip with your left hand. Slide the sample tray off the transport arm and onto tray track No. 1.
Track No. 1
Tray Transport Arm
Tray HookJammed Sample Tray
Tray Retention Clip
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–13
Troubleshooting
Clearing Sample Tray Jams
5–14 VITROS 250/350 C
4. Move the transport arm manually to the right approximately one inch to disengage the tray hook from the sample tray.
5. Close the top cover.
6. Touch the status console to gain access to the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
7. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules.
8. If the condition recurs, ask your key operator for assistance.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Troubleshooting
Clearing Sample Metering Jams
Clearing Sample Metering Jams T
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
o clear jams in the sample metering area:
1. Open both top covers.
2. Grasp the proboscis, and carefully push it up until it clears the obstruction. If you push the proboscis too high, the tip may eject. This could result in a serum spill if the tip is still full.
3. You may also need to manually move the truck until the proboscis has cleared the obstruction.
4. Close the top covers.
5. Touch the status console to gain access to the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
6. Touch INITIALIZE to reset the modules.
7. If the condition recurs, ask your key operator for assistance.
Proboscis
Truck
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–15
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door C
t
5–16 VITROS 250/350 C
heck to see if the cartridge has partially entered the slide supply from he cartridge load station. If the cartridge has not yet entered the slide supply, do the following:
1. Verify that the cartridge was inserted into the correct slide supply (yellow top label in slide supply 1, white top label in slide supply 2).
2. Verify that the side bar code label on the cartridge is facing the rear of the analyzer.
3. Check the bar code label for damage. If damaged, try using one of the manual cartridge loading procedures, or try a new cartridge.
4. If the label is not damaged, try reloading the cartridge. With a smooth, continuous motion, push the cartridge into the opening as far as it will go. A beep will sound indicating that the cartridge was accepted for loading into the slide supply.
If the cartridge has entered the slide supply, there may be a cartridge jam at the load door. You must remove any jammed cartridge manually. To clear a slide cartridge jam at one of the load doors:
1. Allow all slide processing to complete if possible.
2. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
3. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
12
Cartridge Load Station
Slide Supply 1Yellow Top Label
Slide Supply 2White Top Label
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door
4. Touch MEDS.
DIAGNOSTICS
May 19 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
MD00A
HELPRETURN
SUBSYSTEM TESTS
MEDS
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS
SETUP/ ADJUST
HARDWARE AND CHEM
INFO
PERFORM-ANCE
TESTS
COMPLEX TESTS
LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER
REMOTE ENABLED
MEDS – Main Menu
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME00A
HELPRETURN
SLIDESUPPLY 1
SAMPLEHANDLER
RM/IRMETERING
SAMPLEMETERING
REFLECTO-METER
SLIDE SUPPLY 2 INCUBATOR
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–17
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door
5–18 VITROS 250/350 C
5. Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 1.
6. Touch LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to Open.
MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 1
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ME02A
LOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
UNLOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
CYCLELOAD
DOOR
CYCLEUNLOAD
DOOR
RELEASECARTRIDGE
NEST N TOLOAD
NEST N TODISPENSE
NEST N TOVIEWPORT
CYCLECW
CYCLECCW
CYCLEPLUNGER
CHECKSLIDECOUNT
DISPENSESLIDE
DISPENSEBLADE
OUTER RING
DISPENSE BLADE
INNER RING
HOMEDISPENSE.
BLADE
DISPENSEBLADEPARK
DISPENSEBLADE CM
DISPENSEBLADE PMINC DEPTH
CYCLEDISPENSE
BLADE
PLUNGER
UP | DOWN
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RESETSLIDE
SUPPLY
Feb 22 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
DISPENSEBLADE
METERING
INC DEPTH
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Load Door
7. Open the top right analyzer cover.
8. If a cartridge is jammed in the load door and is protruding above the door, use the eraser end of a pencil and push the cartridge up and out of the slide supply. Gently pull out the cartridge.
9. When you have finished checking the slide supply 1 load door, touch LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to close for supply 1.
10. Touch RETURN.
11. Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 2.
12. Touch LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to OPEN for slide supply 2.
13. If a cartridge is jammed in the load door and is protruding above the door, use the eraser end of a pencil and push the cartridge up and out of the slide supply. Gently pull out the cartridge.
14. When you have finished checking the slide supply 2 load door, touch LOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to CLOSE for slide supply 2.
15. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
16. Touch RETURN until you exit Diagnostics. The analyzer will initialize.
17. If the condition recurs or you could not extract the cartridge, ask your key operator for assistance.
Load Door
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–19
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door I
b
5–20 VITROS 250/350 C
f a cartridge is stuck at one of the unload doors, the cartridge rotor may e out of position, there may be an unusual condition in the unload
door, or slide cartridges may be backed up in the discard chute.
To clear a slide cartridge jam at one of the unload doors:
1. Allow all slide processing to complete if possible.
2. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
3. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
4. Touch MEDS.
DIAGNOSTICS
May 19 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
MD00A
HELPRETURN
SUBSYSTEM TESTS
MEDS
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS
SETUP/ ADJUST
HARDWARE AND CHEM
INFO
PERFORM-ANCE
TESTS
COMPLEX TESTS
LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door
5. Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 1.
6. Touch UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to OPEN.
MEDS – Main Menu
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME00A
HELPRETURN
SLIDESUPPLY 1
SAMPLEHANDLER
RM/IRMETERING
SAMPLEMETERING
REFLECTO-METER
SLIDE SUPPLY 2 INCUBATOR
REMOTE ENABLED
MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 1
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ME02A
LOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
UNLOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
CYCLELOAD
DOOR
CYCLEUNLOAD
DOOR
RELEASECARTRIDGE
NEST N TOLOAD
NEST N TODISPENSE
NEST N TOVIEWPORT
CYCLECW
CYCLECCW
CYCLEPLUNGER
CHECKSLIDECOUNT
DISPENSESLIDE
DISPENSEBLADE
OUTER RING
DISPENSE BLADE
INNER RING
HOMEDISPENSE.
BLADE
DISPENSEBLADEPARK
DISPENSEBLADE CM
DISPENSEBLADE PMINC DEPTH
CYCLEDISPENSE
BLADE
PLUNGER
UP | DOWN
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RESETSLIDE
SUPPLY
Feb 22 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
DISPENSEBLADE
METERING
INC DEPTH
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–21
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door
5–22 VITROS 250/350 C
7. Open the right front analyzer door.
8. Remove the cartridge disposal box to gain access to the cartridge-discard chute.
9. Reach up into the cartridge-discard chute, and locate the cartridge-unload door for slide supply 1. Feel inside the open door for a jammed cartridge. If a cartridge is present, try to pull the cartridge through the open door.
10. When you have finished checking the slide supply 1 unload door, touch UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to CLOSE for slide supply 1.
11. Touch RETURN.
12. Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 2.
13. Touch UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to OPEN for slide supply 2.
Cartridge-DisposalBox
Cartridge-DiscardChute
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Unload Door
14. Reach up into the cartridge discard chute, and locate the cartridge unload door for slide supply 2. Feel inside the open door for a jammed cartridge. If a cartridge is present, try to pull the cartridge through the open door.
15. When you have finished checking the slide supply 2 unload door, touch UNLOAD DOOR OPEN | CLOSE to toggle it to CLOSE for slide supply 2.
16. Empty the cartridge disposal box, and reinsert the disposal box into the analyzer.
17. Close the front right analyzer door.
18. Touch RETURN until you exit Diagnostics. The analyzer will initialize.
19. If the condition recurs or you could not extract the cartridge, ask your key operator for assistance.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–23
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Slide Supply Access Door
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Slide Supply Access Door T
5–24 VITROS 250/350 C
o clear a slide cartridge jam at the slide supply access door:
1. Allow all slide processing to complete if possible.
2. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
3. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
4. Touch MEDS.
5. Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 1.
6. Touch RESET SLIDE SUPPLY.
7. Wait for the message “SS1 SS2 INC R/C PM INOP” to appear in the status bar.
8. Open the top cover of the analyzer.
9. Open the slide supply viewport window cover to observe the slide supplies. Wait until the slide supplies have finished moving (about 30 seconds).
Slide SupplyViewport
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Slide Supply Access Door
10. Open the right front analyzer door.
11. Remove the cartridge disposal box for easier access to the slide supply access door.
12. Reach above the cartridge disposal box area to locate the slide supply access door. Refer to the “Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams” section of the slide supply label which is located on the front of the slide supply.
Cartridge-DisposalBox
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–25
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge Jams at the Slide Supply Access Door
5–26 VITROS 250/350 C
13. Loosen the access door screw. The access door will swing open.
14. Reach into the slide supply and remove any jammed cartridges.
15. Close the slide supply access door and tighten the access door screw.
IMPORTANT: The slide supply access door must be closed and the access door screw tightened to maintain the correct humidity and temperature in the slide supplies.
16. Empty the cartridge disposal box, and reinsert the disposal box into the analyzer.
17. Close the right front door and the top cover of the analyzer.
18. Touch RETURN three times to exit to the Main Menu. The analyzer will initialize.
19. If the condition recurs or you could not extract the cartridge, ask your key operator for assistance or contact your Customer Support Representative.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path,and the Platen Area
Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path, and the Platen Area T
d
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
o clear a slide cartridge or a slide jam at the slide dispense station, the ispense blade path, or the platen area:
1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
2. Open the slide supply view port cover.
3. Make note of the cartridge rotor nest numbers. This may be helpful if the condition recurs.
4. Close the slide supply view port cover.
5. Close the top right analyzer cover.
6. Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
7. Touch INITIALIZE to return the analyzer to normal operation.
Slide SupplyViewport
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–27
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path,and the Platen Area
5–28 VITROS 250/350 C
If this does not correct the condition, do the following:
8. Repeat steps 1 through 3.
9. Remove the platen cover by loosening the two quarter-turn fasteners, and set it aside.
10. Turn the knob located on the left side of the slide dispense motor clockwise (down) until you hear a ratchet noise. This should fully retract the dispense blade from the slide dispense area.
Platen Cover
Slide-Dispense Blade
Knob
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path,and the Platen Area
11. Remove any slides that are hanging out of the cartridge by pulling them out of the cartridge. Note the cartridge by placing an “X” on the top label with a pencil. (Do not use a pen or marker.) This allows you to track the cartridge to determine if it jams repeatedly.
If a cartridge was jammed in this location, it should drop back into the slide supply.
NOTE: The cartridge may not drop down if the plunger is still in the “up” position. (The platens will be raised if the plunger is still in the “up” position.) If this occurs, actuate the slide supply plungers through MEDS to lower the plungers.
— Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
— Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
DIAGNOSTICS
May 19 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
MD00A
HELPRETURN
SUBSYSTEM TESTS
MEDS
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS
SETUP/ ADJUST
HARDWARE AND CHEM
INFO
PERFORM-ANCE
TESTS
COMPLEX TESTS
LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER
REMOTE ENABLED
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–29
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path,and the Platen Area
5–30 VITROS 250/350 C
— Touch MEDS.
— Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 1.
— Touch PLUNGER UP | DOWN to toggle once or twice, as needed, to make the plunger move down.
MEDS – Main Menu
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME00A
HELPRETURN
SLIDESUPPLY 1
SAMPLEHANDLER
RM/IRMETERING
SAMPLEMETERING
REFLECTO-METER
SLIDE SUPPLY 2 INCUBATOR
REMOTE ENABLED
MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 1
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ME02A
LOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
UNLOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
CYCLELOAD
DOOR
CYCLEUNLOAD
DOOR
RELEASECARTRIDGE
NEST N TOLOAD
NEST N TODISPENSE
NEST N TOVIEWPORT
CYCLECW
CYCLECCW
CYCLEPLUNGER
CHECKSLIDECOUNT
DISPENSESLIDE
DISPENSEBLADE
OUTER RING
DISPENSE BLADE
INNER RING
HOMEDISPENSE.
BLADE
DISPENSEBLADEPARK
DISPENSEBLADE CM
DISPENSEBLADE PMINC DEPTH
CYCLEDISPENSE
BLADE
PLUNGER
UP | DOWN
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RESETSLIDE
SUPPLY
Feb 22 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
DISPENSEBLADE
METERING
INC DEPTH
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path,and the Platen Area
— Touch RETURN.
— Touch SLIDE SUPPLY 2.
— Touch PLUNGER UP | DOWN to toggle once or twice, as needed, to make the plunger move down.
— Touch RETURN until you exit Diagnostics. The analyzer will initialize.
12. Verify that the cartridge below the platens is positioned correctly. The side bar code label should face the front of the analyzer. If the cartridge is positioned incorrectly, you will need to unload it using the Unload features in Cartridge Handling.
— Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
MEDS – Main Menu – Slide Supply 2
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
ME02A
LOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
UNLOADDOOR
OPEN | CLOSE
CYCLELOAD
DOOR
CYCLEUNLOAD
DOOR
RELEASECARTRIDGE
NEST N TOLOAD
NEST N TODISPENSE
NEST N TOVIEWPORT
CYCLECW
CYCLECCW
CYCLEPLUNGER
CHECKSLIDECOUNT
DISPENSESLIDE
DISPENSEBLADE
OUTER RING
DISPENSE BLADE
INNER RING
HOMEDISPENSE.
BLADE
DISPENSEBLADEPARK
DISPENSEBLADE CM
DISPENSEBLADE PMINC DEPTH
CYCLEDISPENSE
BLADE
PLUNGER
UP | DOWN
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
RESETSLIDE
SUPPLY
Feb 22 XX
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
DISPENSEBLADE
METERING
INC DEPTH
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–31
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path,and the Platen Area
5–32 VITROS 250/350 C
— Touch CARTRIDGE HANDLING.
— Touch BY POSITION in the Unload column.
— Empty the cartridge disposal box.
— Use SCROLL UP and SCROLL DOWN to select a position to unload. To ensure that the correct cartridge is unloaded, check that the correct test and lot number are highlighted.
— Touch UNLOAD SELECTED POSITION.
14:13:12
VX.XX**250OFFON
CH01A
CARTRIDGE HANDLING
Unload:
ALLEMPTY
CARTRIDGES
BYPOSITION
BYTEST / LOT
ALLCARTRIDGESBY SUPPLY
SLIDESUPPLY
CONTENTS
Display:
BYPOSITION
MANUALLOT #
ENTRY
Load:
NEWGEN
SLIDEINVENTORY
Nov 02 92
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a function.
Dec 01 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250CH01G
HELPRETURN
CARTRIDGE HANDLING - Unload Cartidge by Position - SUPPLY 1
> Empty the Cartridge Disposal Box. Use the SCROLL targets to selecta position for unload; then touch UNLOAD SELECTED POSITIONS.
SCROLLDOWN
SCROLLUP
NEXTPAGE
PREVIOUSPAGE
Page 1 of 3Nest : Test:
BuBcBUNCaBuBcCl-CHOL
BuBc
Slides:503150184311
05
Lot . Number:0216-44440103-11110314-11110216-77774001-34560808-4097
0216-7777
Cal'd Fluids:SSSSSS
S
Elapsed Days:15.619.919.914.818.819.8
14.7
CHANGESUPPLY
Current:SSSSSS
S
UNLOADSELECTEDPOSITION
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
910111213
READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path,and the Platen Area
— Repeat the procedure to unload more cartridges if desired.
— Touch RETURN to exit.
— Retrieve the cartridge from the cartridge disposal box.
13. Inspect the slide path, platen cover, and dispense blade for dirt. Clean parts as necessary using a cotton-tipped swab moistened with distilled or ionized water.
14. If the cartridge is jammed in slide supply 2, you may need to remove the tip-locator assembly. Open the incubator cover.
Incubator Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–33
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path,and the Platen Area
5–34 VITROS 250/350 C
15. Loosen the one thumbscrew that secures the tip-locator cover to the tip-locator assembly. Remove the tip-locator cover, and set it aside.
16. Loosen the three thumbscrews on the tip-locator assembly.
17. Lift the tip-locator assembly and the transverse shuttle out of the way.
Tip-LocatorAssembly Cover
Tip-Locator Assembly
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Cartridge and Slide Jams at the Slide Dispense Station, the Dispense Blade Path,and the Platen Area
18. Remove the platen cover to gain access to the cartridge and remove any slides that are hanging out of the cartridge by pulling them out of the cartridge. Note the cartridge by placing an “X” on the top label with a pencil. (Do not use a pen or marker.) This allows you to track the cartridge to determine if it jams repeatedly.
If a cartridge was jammed in this location, the cartridge should drop back into the slide supply.
19. Place the transverse shuttle into the tip-locator assembly, place the assembly into position, and hand tighten the three thumbscrews.
20. Replace the tip-locator cover, and hand tighten the one thumbscrew.
21. Close the incubator cover.
22. Replace the platen cover.
23. Close the slide supply view port cover.
24. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
25. Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
26. Touch INITIALIZE to return the analyzer to normal operation.
27. If the condition recurs, unload the cartridges marked with an “X”. Use the Unload features in Cartridge Handling.
28. Reload any cartridges that were not marked with an “X”.
29. Initialize the analyzer again.
30. If the condition recurs, ask your key operator for assistance.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–35
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position
Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position I
5–36 VITROS 250/350 C
MPORTANT: Incubator nest position 24 contains the reference slide. Do not remove this slide during the jam-clearing process. (If hardware Mod No. 9 is installed, this position contains the Spectralon block.)
1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
2. Open the incubator cover.
Incubator Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position
3. Loosen the one thumbscrew that secures the tip-locator cover to the tip-locator assembly. Remove the tip-locator cover, and set it aside.
4. Loosen the three thumbscrews on the tip-locator assembly.
5. Lift the tip-locator assembly and transverse shuttle out of the way.
Tip-LocatorAssembly Cover
Tip-Locator Assembly
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–37
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position
5–38 VITROS 250/350 C
6. Locate the plastic gear that moves the CM/RT slide eject blade.
— Turn the gear clockwise to bring the blade as far as possible to the center of the incubator disk. If the gear is obstructed by one of the four incubator disk spokes, try to turn the gear by push-ing on the gear’s teeth with an applicator stick.
7. Check to see if any slides are present in the area under the tip-locator assembly. If so, discard them.
8. Check for sticky spots in the tip-locator area and the bottom of the tip-locator assembly.
— Use the edge of a spare slide to remove any glue deposits from the slide reference edge on the underside of the tip-locator assembly. Discard the slide when you are finished.
— Wipe the rest of the tip-locator assembly with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. Avoid touching electrical parts. Use light pressure only.
— Moisten a cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. Use the swab to clean the area under the tip-locator assembly.
Tip-Locator Assembly
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position
9. Remove the transverse shuttle and dislodge any slides that are stuck in the CM/RT discard chute or transverse shuttle. Use an applicator stick, and push the applicator stick straight down the discard chute.
If the discard chute is plugged with slides, open the front right door of the analyzer.
— Remove the slide disposal box.
— Discard the liner and its contents following your established laboratory procedures for the disposal of biohazardous materials.
— Place a new liner in the slide disposal box.
— Be sure slides have not dropped down behind the slide dis-posal box.
— Reinsert the slide disposal box into the analyzer.
10. Moisten some cotton-tip swabs with distilled or deionized water. Use these swabs to clean the interior walls of the discard chute. Allow the discard chute to air dry.
DiscardChute
TransverseShuttle
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–39
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams in the Transverse Shuttle and at the CM/RT Eject Blade Position
5–40 VITROS 250/350 C
11. Verify that you can rotate the incubator disk by hand.
12. Line up one of the incubator nest positions with the labeled slot marked by two raised bars or rails.
13. Place the transverse shuttle into the tip-locator assembly, place the assembly into position, and hand tighten the three thumbscrews.
14. Replace the tip-locator cover, and hand tighten the one thumbscrew.
15. If you were not successful in finding the jam, check each of the incubator evaporation cap springs. Make sure each spring is locked in place.
16. Close the incubator cover.
17. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
18. Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
19. Touch INITIALIZE to return the analyzer to normal operation.
Incubator
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and at the PM Slide-Eject Position
Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and at the PM Slide-Eject Position I
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
MPORTANT: Incubator nest position 24 contains the reference slide. Do not remove this slide during the jam-clearing process.
1. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
2. Open the incubator cover.
Incubator Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–41
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and at the PM Slide-Eject Position
5–42 VITROS 250/350 C
3. Loosen the two quarter-turn fasteners on the electrometer.
4. Lift the electrometer into the maintenance position. Swing down the kickstand for support.
Electrometer
Kickstand
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and at the PM Slide-Eject Position
5. Remove any slides present under the electrometer.
6. Dislodge any slides that are stuck in the discard chute. Use an applicator stick, and push the applicator stick straight down the discard chute.
If the discard chute is plugged with slides, open the front right door of the analyzer.
— Remove the slide disposal box.
— Discard the liner and its contents following your established laboratory procedures for the disposal of biohazardous materials.
— Place a new liner in the slide disposal box.
— Be sure slides have not dropped down behind the slide dis-posal box.
— Reinsert the slide disposal box into the analyzer.
7. Moisten some cotton-tip swabs with distilled or deionized water. Use these swabs to clean the interior walls of the discard chute. Allow the discard chute to air dry.
8. If the metal surface under the electrometer is sticky, use a cotton-tip swab moistened with distilled or deionized water to clean it. Dry the area with a lint-free cloth.
9. If the underside of the electrometer is sticky, wipe it with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water.
Discard Chute
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–43
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams at the Electrometer Discard Station and at the PM Slide-Eject Position
5–44 VITROS 250/350 C
10. Locate the plastic gear that moves the PM slide eject blade.
— Turn the gear clockwise to bring the blade as far as possible to the center of the incubator disk. If the gear is obstructed by one of the four incubator disk spokes, try to turn the gear by push-ing on the gear’s teeth with an applicator stick.
11. Verify that you can rotate the incubator disk by hand.
12. Line up one of the incubator nest positions with the labeled slot marked by two raised bars or rails.
13. Return the electrometer to its normal operation position, and hand tighten the two quarter-turn fasteners.
14. If you were not successful in finding the jam, check each of the incubator evaporation cap springs. Make sure each spring is locked in place.
15. Close the incubator cover.
16. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
17. Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
18. Touch INITIALIZE to return the analyzer to normal operation.
Incubator
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area
Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area T
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
o clear a slide jam in the tip-locator/metering area:
1. Allow all slide processing to complete if possible.
2. Lift the top right cover of the analyzer.
3. Open the incubator cover.
Incubator Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–45
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area
5–46 VITROS 250/350 C
4. Loosen the one thumbscrew that secures the tip-locator assembly cover to the tip-locator assembly.
5. Remove the tip-locator cover and set it aside.
6. Loosen the three thumbscrews on the tip-locator assembly.
7. Lift the tip-locator assembly and transverse shuttle out of the way.
8. Turn the knob located on the left side of the slide dispense blade motor to retract the dispense blade from the slide dispense area.
9. Remove any slide found in the tip-locator area.
Tip-LocatorAssembly Cover
Tip-Locator Assembly
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area
10. If there is a slide partially in the incubator disk, remove and discard it.
11. Push down on the slide elevator to see if it binds and to see if it springs back into position.
12. Check for sticky spots in the tip-locator area and the bottom of the tip-locator assembly. If any,
— Use the edge of a spare slide to remove any glue deposits from the slide block area on the underside of the tip-locator assem-bly. Discard the slide when you are finished.
Elevator
Tip-Locator Assembly
SlideReferenceEdge
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–47
Troubleshooting
Clearing Slide Jams in the Tip-Locator/Metering Area
5–48 VITROS 250/350 C
— Wipe the rest of the tip-locator assembly with a lint-free cloth moistened with distilled or deionized water. Avoid touching electrical parts. Use light pressure only.
— Moisten a cotton swab with distilled or deionized water. Use the swab to clean the area under the tip-locator assembly.
— Allow the tip-locator assembly to air dry.
13. Replace the tip-locator assembly, and hand-tighten the three thumbscrews.
14. Place the transverse shuttle into the tip-locator assembly, place the assembly into position, and hand tighten the one thumbscrew.
15. Close the incubator cover
16. Close the top right analyzer cover.
17. Touch the status console to access the error log screen showing the INITIALIZE target.
18. Touch INITIALIZE to return the analyzer to normal operation.
19. If the condition recurs, ask your key operator for assistance.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting Procedures
General Troubleshooting Procedures
Blank Control Unit Monitor Tt
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
he control unit monitor has a screen-saver feature. If you do not touch he screen for ten minutes or longer, the screen goes blank automatically. To troubleshoot a blank screen:
CRT Monitor
1. Touch the screen or press any key on the keyboard.2. If the screen remains blank,
— Verify that the touch screen frame is securely fastened to both sides of the monitor. (The touch screen is a separate compo-nent that snaps over the screen of the monitor. It snaps into place by fitting the two holes in the touch screen frame over two raised discs on the sides of the monitor.)
— Check the power on LED at the right bottom corner of the mon-itor. If it is not on, turn on the power switch to the monitor.
— Turn the brightness and contrast knobs all the way in both directions. Turning the knobs clockwise will increase the inten-sity; counter clockwise will decrease the intensity. These knobs are on the lower right portion of the monitor. The contrast knob ( ) is on the left. The brightness knob ( ) is on the right.
3. If the screen is still blank, ask your key operator for assistance.
LCD Monitor
1. Touch the screen or press any key on the keyboard.2. If the screen remains blank,
— Check the power on LED. If it is not on, turn on the power switch to the monitor.
— Adjust the brightness and contrast settings by touching the Menu button on the right side of the monitor and following the on-screen instructions.
3. If the screen is still blank, ask your key operator for assistance.
Touch Screen is not Functioning Properly
CRT Monitor
1. Make sure all four sides of the touch screen frame are free of dust.2. If the condition persists, ask your key operator for assistance.
LCD Monitor
1. Make sure all cables are secured to the back of the monitor.2. If the condition persists, ask your key operator for assistance.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–49
Troubleshooting
Touch Screen is Visible But Targets Do Not Respond
Touch Screen is Visible But Targets Do Not Respond
CRT and LCD Monitors
5–50 VITROS 250/350 C
1. Try touching the HELP target dead center, at its perimeter, and the screen near the HELP target.
2. If there is no response:
— Look in the upper right corner of the screen to see if the clock is running.
— Make a note of screen activities that you performed prior to noticing that the screen would not respond.
— Open the front right analyzer door.
— Press the Program Load/Reset Button until the screen goes blank.
— The analyzer will reload the software.
3. If the analyzer fails computer system checks during the software reload, make note of the information detailed on the screen or on the printer.
4. Ask your key operator for assistance.
The Analyzer Cannot be Powered Up I
f you cannot power up the analyzer:1. Verify that the main power cord for the analyzer is attached securely to the wall receptacle and to the back of the analyzer.
2. Verify that the circuit breaker controlling the wall receptacle is on.
3. Verify that the circuit breaker inside the Sample Handler portion of the analyzer is on.
— Open the front left door of the analyzer (Sample Handler front door).
— The breaker is located in the lower left at the back of the Sam-ple Handler.
— There is a group of five breakers. Each breaker has a different color, and its nominal voltage is printed beneath it.
— There is a slotted metal piece above these breakers.
— Only one of the breakers lines up with a slot in the metal piece (red breaker; 115v).
— This one breaker should be up and the others down.
— Close the front left analyzer door.
4. If the condition persists, ask your key operator for assistance.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Troubleshooting
No Results are Printing
No Results are Printing T
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
o troubleshoot printing problems:
1. Verify that the printer’s power switch is on. The power indicator on the printer control panel will be lit.
2. Verify that the printer power cord is attached securely at both ends.
3. Verify that the printer interface cable is attached securely at both ends.
4. Verify that the printer has paper, and the paper is loaded properly.
5. Verify that the Select Indicator Light is lit on the printer control panel.
6. Press the PrtScr key to test the printer.
If results still will not print, check the status of the reporting devices.
1. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
2. Touch OPTIONS on the Main Menu.
3. Type the operator access code, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
Jul 15 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP00B
> Touch a target to select an option.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONSSystem Services
SUBSYSTEMCONTROL
ANALYZERCONFIG
SPECIALSERVICES
REPORTCONTROL
WORKLOAD& USAGEREPORTS
Disk Srvcs
LOADCAL
DISKETTE
DISKFILE
SERVICES
BACKUP/RESTOREDISKETTE
Cal Data
CALPARAMS
CALIBRATORSAVs
CALIBRATORLOT #
SELECTION
Test Data
TEST/FLUID
CONFIG
DILUENTDATA
COEF&
LIMITS
ADDITIONALTESTS
CONFIG
PRINTCONFIGREPORT
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–51
Troubleshooting
No Results are Printing
5–52 VITROS 250/350 C
4. Touch REPORT CONTROL in the System Services column.
5. Touch DEVICE/REPORT CONTROL.
6. ON should be highlighted on the PRINTER A target. If the target is OFF:
— Turn the printer main power switch off, then back to on again.
— Touch the PRINTER A target to highlight ON.
Dec 01 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP04A
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a category.
OPTIONS – Report/Communications Control Categories
DEVICE/ REPORT
CONTROL
REPORT REQUEST DEFAULTS
REPORT PRINT MODE
OP04C
HELPRETURN
> Touch targets to change communications, devices, reports, or printer paths.
OPTIONS – Report/Communications Control Categories
DEVICE/ REPORT
CONTROL
Lab Computer
TRANSMIT RESULTSON OFF
Device Control
PRINTER A
ON OFF
Reports
PATIENT REPORTON OFF
Printer Paths
PATIENT REPORT A B
REPORT REQUEST DEFAULTS
RECEIVE TESTS
ON OFF
PRINTER B
ON OFF
LAB REPORTON OFF
LAB REPORTA B
REPORT PRINT MODE
CAL REPORTON OFF
CAL REPORTA B
MISC REPORTA B
Dec 01 92
14:13:12
VS.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Troubleshooting
No Results are Printing
7. Check the targets in the Reports column. Verify that the necessary report targets have ON highlighted.
8. Check the targets in the Printer Paths column. Verify that the reports are being directed to the correct printer. (The printer used for the report should be highlighted.)
9. Check the targets in the Lab Computer column. ON should be highlighted if a lab computer is in use; OFF should be highlighted is no lab computer is in use.
10. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
11. Press the PrtScr key to test the printer.
If the printer still does not print, reset the analyzer.
1. Touch SHUTDOWN ANALYZER.
2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted. Wait until you see the message, “The analyzer has been shutdown. Reset or power down is required.”
3. Turn the printer main power switch off, then on again.
4. Open the right front door of the analyzer.
5. Press the Program Load/Reset Button.
Program Load/ResetButton
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–53
Troubleshooting
No Results are Printing
5–54 VITROS 250/350 C
6. Close the right front door of the analyzer. The Main Menu will display when reset is complete.
NOTE: Program Load/Reset takes approximately ten minutes.
7. Verify that the correct date and time are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. To correct the date and time, see the “Special Services” section of Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Operator’s Manual, or see the Operator’s Quick Guide.
8. Press the PrtScr key to test the printer.
9. If the printer still will not print, ask your key operator for assistance.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Troubleshooting
Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer
Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer T
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/3
o troubleshoot lab computer communication problems:
1. Verify that the computer interface cable is attached securely to the bottom serial port on the back right area of the analyzer.
2. Verify that the lab computer is ready to accept data from the analyzer.
3. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
4. Touch OPTIONS on the Main Menu.
5. Type the operator access code, and press the Enter key on the keyboard.
Jul 15 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP00B
> Touch a target to select an option.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONSSystem Services
SUBSYSTEMCONTROL
ANALYZERCONFIG
SPECIALSERVICES
REPORTCONTROL
WORKLOAD& USAGEREPORTS
Disk Srvcs
LOADCAL
DISKETTE
DISKFILE
SERVICES
BACKUP/RESTOREDISKETTE
Cal Data
CALPARAMS
CALIBRATORSAVs
CALIBRATORLOT #
SELECTION
Test Data
TEST/FLUID
CONFIG
DILUENTDATA
COEF&
LIMITS
ADDITIONALTESTS
CONFIG
PRINTCONFIGREPORT
50 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–55
Troubleshooting
Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer
5–56 VITROS 250/350 Chem
6. Touch REPORT CONTROL in the System Services column.
7. Touch DEVICE/REPORT CONTROL.
8. Check the targets in the Lab Computer column.
— ON should be highlighted on the TRANSMIT RESULTS target to transmit results to the laboratory computer.
— ON should be highlighted on the RECEIVE TESTS target to receive test results from the laboratory computer.
9. Touch RETURN twice to return to the main Options screen.
Dec 01 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP04A
HELPRETURN
> Touch a target to select a category.
OPTIONS – Report/Communications Control Categories
DEVICE/ REPORT
CONTROL
REPORT REQUEST DEFAULTS
REPORT PRINT MODE
OP04C
HELPRETURN
> Touch targets to change communications, devices, reports, or printer paths.
OPTIONS – Report/Communications Control Categories
DEVICE/ REPORT
CONTROL
Lab Computer
TRANSMIT RESULTSON OFF
Device Control
PRINTER A
ON OFF
Reports
PATIENT REPORTON OFF
Printer Paths
PATIENT REPORT A B
REPORT REQUEST DEFAULTS
RECEIVE TESTS
ON OFF
PRINTER B
ON OFF
LAB REPORTON OFF
LAB REPORTA B
REPORT PRINT MODE
CAL REPORTON OFF
CAL REPORTA B
MISC REPORTA B
Dec 01 92
14:13:12
VS.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
istry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/3
Troubleshooting
Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer
10. Touch ANALYZER CONFIG in the System Services column.
11. Touch LAB COMPUTER CONFIG in the Reports column.
This screen highlights the current lab computer communication configuration.
— BIDIRECT enables the analyzer to receive sample program-ming information from (download) and send results to (upload) the lab computer.
Jul 15 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP00E
> Touch a target to select a category.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONS – Analyzer Configuration
Memory
LANGUAGE
CONFIG
SAMPLE PROGRAM
RETENTION
RESULT RECORD
RETENTION
ReportsTests
DILUENT TRAY
CONFIG
TEST REPORTING
CONFIG
Functions
STATUS CONSOLE
ANALYZER NAME
CONFIG
LAB COMPUTER
CONFIG
PATIENT REPORT CONFIG
LAB REPORT CONFIG
PRINTER REPORT CONFIG
LANGUAGE
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
CONFIG
AUTOMATION
CONFIG
ENHANCED RANGE
REPORTING
Jul 15 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
OP22G
> Touch a target to change an option or mode and to select a parameter.
HELPRETURN
OPTIONS – Laboratory Computer Communications Configuration Selection
BIDIRECT
UPLOAD ONLY
NO COMMUN
Modes
NAK ZEROYES NO
Parameters
PORT FORMAT
PROTOCOL DEFINITION
PACKET FORMAT
50 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–57
Troubleshooting
Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer
5–58 VITROS 250/350 Chem
— UPLOAD ONLY enables the analyzer to send results (upload) to the lab computer.
— NO COMM disables the communication link between the ana-lyzer and the lab computer.
12. Contact the lab computer personnel to acquire the information necessary to verify the laboratory computer communications configuration screens.
— Each screen highlights the current configuration settings.
— To view or edit a current configuration, touch the desired mode or parameter target.
— Any changes you make become effective when you touch RETURN.
See “Laboratory Computer” in Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Operator’s Manual for additional information.
13. Touch RETURN until you reach the Main Menu.
14. Send a report to the lab computer to verify that communication is established. Touch REVIEW RESULTS on the Main Menu.
Dec 01 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
RV01B
> Touch a target to select a function.
HELPRETURN
REVIEW RESULTS
EDIT OR VERIFY
RESULTS
RETRIEVE ARCHIVED RESULTS
REVIEW FILE
CONTENTS
Functions Options
MONITORRESULTS
CUMULATIVERESULTS
istry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/3
Troubleshooting
Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer
15. Touch EDIT OR VERIFY RESULTS.
16. Touch START twice.
Dec 01 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP:TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
RV03A
HELPRETURN
REVIEW RESULTS – Verification and Edit
START
PATIENT NAME:FIRST MI PATIENT ID SAMPLE ID
TODAY'S DATE ALL DATES
> Enter search criteria, select attributes, reports, or function.
STAT
17:39
14:13
CONTROL
12/01/92
ROUTINE11/30/92 START DATE:
END DATE:
START TIME:
END TIME:
ASSIGN REPORTS
ABORTREPORTSTATUS
DOCTOR NAME : LAST FIRST MI DOCTOR ID ATTRIBUTES:
LAST
Dec 01 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
RV06AREVIEW RESULTS - Verification and Edit
GLU ED 168. AMYL AST
BUN LIPA ALT
CREA Ca LDH
NH3 Mg CK
Na+ PHOS CKMB
K+ CHOL ALKP
Cl- TRIG GGT
ECO2 HDLC TBIL
THEO URIC Bu
Fe TP Bc
> Touch associated target area to edit tests.
RETURN HELPEDIT
PATIENT DATA
DELETE RESULT
RECORD
REVIEW NEXT
SAMPLE
REVIEW NEXT
GROUP
REVIEW PREVIOUS
GROUP
Sample ID Pos Track Tray Run Date Run Time Priority Fluid Man Dil
6 2 11/30/92 17:39:43 ROUTINE SERUM 1.000 1115
50 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 5–59
Troubleshooting
Will Not Upload Data to or Download Data from the Lab Computer
5–60 VITROS 250/350 Chem
17. Touch EDIT PATIENT DATA.
18. Touch LABORATORY in the Reports column.
19. Touch COMPUTER in the Reports column.
20. Touch RETURN three times to return to the main Review Results screen.
21. Look at line two of the status console next to “Lab Comp” for a flashing symbol.
— A flashing white box displays for UPLOAD only.
— A flashing “U” displays for BIDIRECTIONAL.
22. Verify that the lab computer received the report.
Dec 01 92
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
RV08A
HELPRETURN
REVIEW RESULTS - Verification and Edit
DELETE RESULT RECORD
> Touch associated target area to edit text fields; then touch reports desired.
REVIEW TEST
RESULTS
REVIEW NEXT
SAMPLE
REPORTING
MODES
IMMEDIATE
REPORTS
DEFERRED
PATIENT
LABORATORY
ARCHIVE
PATIENT ID:
LAST:
FIRST: MI:
BIRTH DATE:
SEX: AGE: ROOM:
OTHER:
DOCTOR LAST:
FIRST: MI:
DOCTOR ID:
Sample ID Pos Track Tray Run Date Run Time Priority Fluid Man Dil
1115 6 2 11/30/92 17:39:43 ROUTINE SERUM 1.000
COMPUTER
istry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
6 Replacing Parts
Installing a New Slide Supply Rotor Sensor*
Removing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor B
S
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
* Key operator training required.
efore you begin this procedure, make sure that testing is complete and ampling is off. This removal procedure is the same whether working
with the slide supply 1 or the slide supply 2 rotor sensor.
To remove the slide supply rotor sensor:
1. Touch SHUTDOWN ANALYZER on the Main Menu.
2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted.
3. Toggle the analyzer’s main power switch to the O, or OFF, position when the screen indicates that the analyzer has been shut down.
4. Lift the top right analyzer cover. The slide transport area is indicated by the letter “D” on the label under the analyzer cover.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 6–1
Replacing Parts
Removing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor
6–2 VITROS 250/350 C
5. Loosen the two quarter-turn fasteners, and remove the platen cover.
6. Locate the desired slide supply rotor sensor. These sensors are found near the slide-dispense path. The slide supply 1 sensor is the one located furthest from the incubator center.
7. Lift the sensor straight up out of its mounting holes in the slide supply.
Platen Cover
Slide Supply 1 Sensor
Slide Supply 2 Sensor
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Replacing Parts
Removing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor
8. Detach the sensor from its wiring harness.
— Turn the sensor upside down and locate the safety catch that keeps the wiring securely attached to the sensor.
— Press and hold this catch while pulling the sensor away from its wiring. The wiring should disconnect from the sensor very eas-ily. If not, the safety catch did not release. Do not use force to break this connection.
— Check for a gasket on the bottom of the sensor. If one is present, remove it from the old sensor and install it on the new sensor.
Safety Catch
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 6–3
Replacing Parts
Replacing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor
Replacing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor T
s
6–4 VITROS 250/350 C
his procedure is the same for both the slide supply 1 or the slide upply 2 rotor sensor.
To replace the slide supply rotor sensor:
1. Locate the wiring harness for the new slide supply rotor sensor. The wiring for the slide supply 1 rotor sensor has an orange tag labeled 4A1S1J1. The wiring for the slide supply 2 rotor sensor is labeled 4A2S1J1.
2. Plug the slide supply rotor sensor into its wiring harness. The wiring harness is shaped so that it will only plug into the sensor one way. The safety catch will lock the two pieces together.
3. Gently pull the sensor and wiring in opposite directions to verify that the connection is secure.
4A1S1J1for Sensor 1
4A2S1J1for Sensor 2
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
Replacing Parts
Replacing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor
4. Align the sensor with its openings in the slide supply.
5. Place the sensor in its mounting holes in the slide supply.
6. Replace the platen cover.
— Line up the two platen cover quarter-turn fasteners with the holes in the brass stop plate.
— Lock the quarter-turn fasteners in place by turning clockwise.
4A1S1J1for Sensor 1
Platen Cover
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 6–5
Replacing Parts
Replacing the Slide Supply Rotor Sensor
6–6 VITROS 250/350 C
7. Close the top right cover of the analyzer.
8. Toggle the analyzer main power switch to the I, or ON, position. The analyzer will reload software from the fixed disk and initialize for normal operation.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Replacing Parts
Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade
Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade B
S
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 C
efore you begin this procedure, make sure that testing is complete and ampling is OFF.
To replace a slide supply dispense blade:
1. Touch SHUTDOWN ANALYZER on the Main Menu.
2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted.
3. Toggle the analyzer’s main power switch to the O or OFF position.
4. Open the top right analyzer cover.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 6–7
Replacing Parts
Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade
6–8 VITROS 250/350 C
5. Remove the platen cover by loosening its two quarter-turn fasteners, and set it aside.
6. Turn the knob located on the left side of the slide dispense blade motor clockwise to retract the dispense blade until the tip is between the two platens.
Platen Cover
Slide-Dispense Blade
Knob
Retract bladeto this area.
hemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Replacing Parts
Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade
7. Grasp the tip of the dispense blade with one hand. With the other hand, move the motor knob counter clockwise to help push the blade out. The dispense blade may be difficult to move at first.
8. Orient the replacement blade with the gear teeth pointing up and the hole facing the incubator.
9. Insert the end of the blade with gear teeth on it into the opening between the two platens. Make sure the blade enters the slot in the rear platen.
Pull out blade until it is free.
Motor Knob
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 6–9
Replacing Parts
Replacing a Slide Supply Dispense Blade
6–10 VITRO
10. Push the blade in as far as it will go.
11. Hold the blade in place with one hand, and turn the knob of the dispense blade motor clockwise with the other hand.
12. Continue to turn the knob until the dispense blade is fully retracted.
13. Replace the platen cover.
— Align the two platen cover quarter-turn fasteners with the holes in the brass platen stop plate.
— Lock the quarter-turn fasteners in place by turning clockwise.
14. Close the right top cover of the analyzer.
15. Toggle the analyzer’s main power switch to the |, or ON, position. The analyzer will reload software from the fixed disk and initialize for normal operation.
Insert new blade intoopening in rear platen.
Knob
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Replacing Parts
Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer
Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer
Version 2.0 VITRO
Note: The VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System is supplied with an Okidata Printer or an Epson LX-300+ Printer. Additional information on the Epson LX-300+ Printer can be accessed via the Epson Web page or the Epson Users Guide.
To replace the printhead on the Okidata printer:
1. Turn off the power switch to the printer.
2. Move the bail lever toward the back of the printer.
3. Remove the access cover.
BAIL LEVER
ACCESS COVER
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 6–11
Replacing Parts
Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer
6–12 VITRO
4. Remove the ribbon cartridge by firmly holding the sides of the cartridge and pulling straight up.
WARNING: The printhead may be hot. Use care when touching it to prevent accidental injury.
5. Remove the printhead by grasping the right side of the printhead clamp and lifting the clamp.
NOTE: Do not remove the printhead clamp.
PRINTHEAD
RIBBON CARTRIDGE
CONNECTOR
CARRIAGEFRAME
PRINTHEADCLAMP
PRINTHEAD
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Version 2.0 VITRO
Replacing Parts
Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer
6. To install the new printhead, press it against the carriage frame and seat the printhead in the connector.
CAUTION: In the following step, the printhead clamp must be positioned between the printhead and the carriage frame.
7. Press the printhead against the carriage frame. Press down on the printhead clamp.
PRINTHEAD PRINTHEADCLAMP
CARRIAGEFRAMETOP VIEW
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide 6–13
Replacing Parts
Replacing the Printhead on the Okidata Printer
6–14 VITRO
8. Reinstall the ribbon cartridge:
— Align the tabs with the inserts on the printhead plate.
— Move the ribbon cartridge toward the front of the printer.
— Move the ribbon shield over the printhead.
— Press down on the ribbon cartridge until you hear a click.
9. Replace the access cover and turn on the power switch to the printer.
RIBBONSHIELD
RIBBONCARTRIDGE
PRINTHEADPLATETAB
INSERTPRINTHEAD GAP LEVER
S 250/350 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Index
Numerics120-volt monitor label xviii120-volt printer label xviii
AA/D converter. See Signal processing testA/D reference voltage check, sample metering 3–
39, 3–44Action severity level 5–2Air filter
inspecting and cleaning 2–37Analyzer
front view showing subsystems 5–9labels xii–xixoptions on slide supply label xiiishutting down 5–12
see also Operator’s Manual, Chapter 4top view showing subsystems 5–8
As-required maintenance 2–38–2–73screen display 2–38adjusting reflectometer iris 2–43–2–48changing reflectometer lamp 2–42–2–43cleaning
cabinets 2–54discard chutes 2–51–2–54dispense blade/slide path 2–55–2–56incubator evaporation caps and slots 2–57–2–61proboscis 2–67–2–72PSID scanner window 2–72–2–73
replacinghumidity control packs and desiccant packs 2–39–2–41incubator evaporation caps 2–62–2–66sample metering tubing 2–49–2–50
Assay values, Rate/CM correction factor test 3–20, 3–21, 3–23, 3–27
Asterisks, flashingcorrection factor summary screen 3–26, 3–27environmental monitoring 4–1, 4–15
Attention severity level 5–2Auto checks, electrometer 3–91, 3–96–3–99
contacts down 3–97–3–98contacts up 3–97cycle contacts 3–98extended 3–91, 3–100–3–101
BBacking up QC, Config, and Calibration data 2–35Bar code
reads, PSID scanner 3–53–3–57
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System M
scanner test, cartridge handling 3–102–3–104Basic modes, electrometer 3–91Biohazard label
mixing-cup array and tip-disposal box xivslide disposal box xiv
Biohazardous contamination, cleaning from discard chutes 2–51
Biohazardous waste, disposal of 2–5, 2–36Black correction factor slides. See Black reference
slidesBlack correction factors 3–23, 3–25, 3–49Black reference slides 3–19, 3–23
positioning 3–23Blank screen, troubleshooting 5–49
CCabinets, cleaning 2–54Calibration
data, backing up 2–35diskette, new 2–10
Cartridge disposal box 2–6Cartridge handling performance tests 3–102–3–107
bar code scanner 3–102–3–104plunger count 3–102rotor movement 3–102, 3–105–3–107
Cartridge-disposal box 2–5label xv
Checksums, verifying. See File verifyChemistry, datalogger search criteria 3–109, 3–
119–3–120Cleaning
air filter 2–37analyzer to decontaminate 2–74cabinets 2–54cup retainer 2–34cup, height, and microcollection tube adapters 2–
8discard chutes 2–51–2–54dispense blade/slide path 2–55–2–56incubator evaporation caps and slots 2–57–2–61keypad cover 2–35proboscis 2–67–2–72PSID scanner window 2–72–2–73sample trays 2–7sample-metering path 2–36tip-locator assembly 2–29–2–33touch screen 2–34tray hook 2–28tray platform and transport arm 2–28
Cleaning solutions, which to use xxClearing jams. See Jams, clearingClosing current datalogger file 3–115–3–116
aintenance and Diagnostics Guide Index–i
Index
CM/RT ejectblade position, clearing jams 5–36–5–40MEDS movement sequence 3–16
Complex tests 3–2, 3–38Computer protocol analyzer 3–18Condition codes 3–108, 3–113
datalogger analysis search criteria 3–109error log screen 5–4–5–5recent history log 3–110–3–112subsystem identification 5–4, 5–8, 5–9troubleshooting help screen 5–8–5–9
Configuration data, backing up 2–35Configuring diluent tray 2–21–2–22Contact drive timing test, electrometer 3–94–3–95Contamination
discard chutes 2–51gloves 2–20tip-locator assembly 2–29
Correction factorsblack 3–23displaying and printing 3–25updating 3–28when to update 3–27see also Rate/CM correction factor test
Cup adaptercleaning 2–8
Cup retainer, cleaning 2–34Current setup values, displaying 3–32
DDaily maintenance 2–3–2–26
screen display 2–3diluents 2–18–2–22disposals and supplies 2–3–2–11Immuno-Wash Fluid 2–23–2–26reference fluid 2–12–2–17when to change micro tip 2–14, 2–24when to perform 2–3
Datalogger analysis 3–109, 3–114–3–124accessing and searching files 3–117–3–124closing current file 3–115–3–116search criteria
chemistry 3–109, 3–119–3–120condition codes 3–109environmental data 3–109, 3–122–3–123error codes 3–124incubator position 3–109, 3–121
Date/timeof logged error 5–4verifying after rebooting 5–12
Decontaminating the analyzer 2–74Desiccant packs (humidity control)
Index–ii VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System M
loading for slide supply 2 2–40Desiccant packs (humidity-control)
expiration indicator 2–41loading for slide supply 2 2–41replacing 2–39–2–41
Diagnostics 3–1–3–126screen display 3–1complex tests 3–2, 3–38hardware and chemistry information 3–2, 3–108–
3–126lab computer protocol analyzer 3–1, 3–18MEDS 3–1, 3–3–3–17performance tests 3–2, 3–38–3–107setup/adjust 3–2, 3–18–3–32stand-alone tests 3–2, 3–33–3–37subsystem tests 3–1, 3–18
Diluent supply, testing movement 3–6Diluents, daily maintenance 2–18–2–22
changing diluents and checking stoppers 2–18–2–20
configuring the diluent tray 2–21–2–22Dilution, enabling and disabling 3–4, 3–14Discard chutes, cleaning 2–51–2–54Dispense blade/slide path, cleaning 2–55–2–56Disposals and supplies, daily maintenance 2–3–2–
11screen display 2–3cleaning cup, height, and microcollection tip
adapters 2–8cleaning sample trays 2–7emptying disposal boxes 2–4–2–6loading mixing cup arrays and tips 2–9verifying QC fluids run on slide lots 2–11verifying slide inventory 2–10–2–11
Distilled water, bottles for 2–19Drop detection test, sample metering 3–39, 3–44–
3–48Dynamic test, reflectometer 3–59, 3–66–3–71
run time 3–66
EEEPROM versions, verifying 3–109Electrical hazards xiElectrolyte reference fluid (ERF) label xixElectrometer
A/D converter recalibration 3–91MEDS 3–15
movement sequence 3–16performance tests 3–91–3–101
auto checks 3–91, 3–96–3–99basic modes 3–91contact drive timing 3–91, 3–94–3–95
aintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Index
extended auto checks 3–91, 3–100–3–101normal cycle 3–91, 3–92–3–93
Emptying disposal boxes. See Disposals and suppliesEnvironmental data, datalogger analysis search
criteria 3–109Environmental monitoring 4–1–4–15
screen display 4–1error conditions 4–2–4–15
incubator temperature control 4–2–4–5slide supply humidity control 4–10–4–15slide supply temperature control 4–6–4–9voltage readings 4–15
Error codes. See Condition codesError conditions
environmental 4–2–4–15troubleshooting 5–1–5–11
downloaded samples 5–11error description on help screen 5–9error log screen 5–3–5–6help screens 5–7–5–10possible causes 5–10severity levels 5–1–5–3suggestions for correction 5–10
Error log screen 5–3–5–6accessing 5–3condition code 5–4–5–5displaying for different severity levels 5–6initializing analyzer from 5–6moving highlight bar 5–6returning to previous screen 5–6viewing new errors 5–3
Error messagesdownloaded samples 5–11error log screen 5–5troubleshooting help screen 5–8–5–9
Evaporation capscleaning 2–57–2–61new, part number 2–64replacing 2–62–2–66
Exiting stand-alone diagnostics 3–37Extended auto checks, electrometer 3–91, 3–100–
3–101External reference slides. See White reference slides
FFile verify 3–109, 3–125Flags and codes on forms printer reports 5–11Fluid drop count updates 2–17, 2–26
GGeneral precautions
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System M
cleaning solutions xxmoving parts xx
HHardware and chemistry information 3–2, 3–108–
3–126condition code 3–108, 3–113datalogger analysis 3–109, 3–114–3–124recent history log 3–108, 3–110–3–112software identification 3–109, 3–125–3–126
Hardware modificationssample handler label xivslide supply label xiii
Hardware troubleshooting 5–11–5–48dispense-blade path jams 5–27–5–35initializing analyzer 5–11loading/resetting the analyzer 5–12platen area jams 5–27–5–35sample metering jams 5–15sample tray jams 5–12–5–14slide cartridge jams
load door 5–16–5–19slide supply access door 5–24–5–26unload door 5–20–5–23
slide jamselectrometer discard station/PM slide-eject position 5–41–5–44tip-locator/metering area 5–45–5–48transverse shuttle and CM/RT eject blade position 5–36–5–40
slide-dispense station jams 5–27–5–35Height adapter
cleaning 2–8Help screens for troubleshooting 5–7–5–10
condition code and error message 5–8–5–9error correction 5–10error description 5–9HELP target on error log screen 5–7possible error causes 5–10returning to error log screen 5–10sample/test identification for rerunning 5–9viewing additional text 5–10
High transmission slide (albumin) 3–47History log, recent 3–110–3–112Humidity control packs (magnesium chloride)
loading for slide supply 1 2–40Humidity control packs (magnesium-chloride)
replacing 2–39–2–41Humidity control, slide supply 4–10–4–15Humidity errors 2–39Humidity-control packs. See Desiccant packsHysteresis test
aintenance and Diagnostics Guide Index–iii
Index
immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81, 3–89–3–90reference metering 3–72, 3–79sample metering 3–39, 3–42
IIf 2–6Immuno-rate (IR) metering
performance tests 3–81–3–90system 3–81, 3–84–3–90timing 3–81, 3–82–3–83
Immuno-Wash Fluidchanging micro tip and reservoir 2–24–2–26daily maintenance 2–23–2–26yellow label xix
Immuno-Wash Fluid Reservoirwhen to change 2–24
Incubatorcover, opening (illus) 2–29evaporation caps
cleaning 2–57–2–59replacing 2–62–2–66
MEDS 3–15movement sequence 3–16
performance tests 3–49–3–52pad reflectance 3–49, 3–49–3–50position timing 3–49, 3–51–3–52
slots, cleaning 2–59temperature control 4–2–4–5
Incubator position, datalogger analysis search criteria 3–109
Initialization of analyzer (INITIALIZE target) 5–6, 5–11
Inventory, slide 2–10–2–11Iris adjustment. See Reflectometer iris
JJams, clearing
dispense blade path 5–27dispense-blade path 5–35platen area 5–27–5–35sample tray 5–12–5–14slide
electrometer discard station/PM slide-eject position 5–41–5–44tip-locator/metering area 5–45–5–48transverse shuttle and CM/RT eject blade position 5–36–5–40
slide cartridgeload door 5–16–5–19slide supply access door 5–24–5–26unload door 5–20–5–23
Index–iv VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System M
slide-dispense station 5–27–5–35
KKeypad cover, cleaning 2–35
LLab computer
communication problems 5–55–5–60protocol analyzer 3–1, 3–18
Labelsanalyzer xii–xixlamp replacement instructions 2–42, 2–46subsystem identification 5–8
Lampchanging. See Reflectometer lampextract tool 2–42hot surface label xvreplacement instruction label 2–46
Leak testimmuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81, 3–88–3–89reference metering 3–72, 3–78–3–79sample metering 3–39, 3–40–3–43
Linersmixing cup array and tip disposal box 2–5mixing-cup array and tip disposal box 2–6slide disposal box 2–5, 2–6slide-disposal box 2–6
Loading mixing cup arrays and sample tips 2–9Loading/resetting the analyzer program 5–12Log screen, error 5–3–5–6Loopback
connectorinstalling 3–37TL-3225, in spare parts kit 3–34
tests 3–34–3–37Low transmission slide (magnesium) 3–47
MMaintenance log 2–1
see samples at end of Chapter 2Maintenance. See Periodic maintenanceMalfunction severity level 5–2Mechanical parts of analyzer, exercising 3–1MEDS 3–1, 3–3–3–17
screen display 3–3CM/RT eject movement sequence 3–16electrometer movement sequence 3–15, 3–16immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–14incubator movement sequence 3–15, 3–16PM eject movement sequence 3–16proboscis movement sequence 3–11
aintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Index
pump movement sequence 3–13reference metering 3–14reflectometer 3–17RESET target 3–3sample fluid drop sequence 3–13sample handler movement sequences 3–4–3–6sample metering movement sequences 3–9–3–13slide supplies 1 and 2 movement sequences 3–7–
3–8transverse shuttle movement sequence 3–15, 3–
16truck movement sequence 3–11
Metering jams, sample. See Jams, clearingMicro tip and reservoir
changing Immuno-Wash Fluid 2–24–2–26changing reference fluid 2–14–2–17
Microcollection tube adaptercleaning 2–8
Mixing cup arrayloading 2–9
Mixing-cup arraytesting movement 3–5
Module/error numbererror log screen 5–5
Movement sequences, MEDSCM/RT eject 3–16electrometer 3–16incubator 3–16PM eject 3–16proboscis 3–11pump 3–13sample fluid drop 3–13sample handler 3–5–3–6sample metering 3–10–3–13slide supplies 1 and 2 3–8transverse shuttle 3–16truck 3–11
Moving parts, caution with xx
NNEXT/PREVIOUS SCREEN targets
on troubleshooting help screen 5–10
OOccupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA) standards 2–1, 2–74
PParts
replacing 6–1–6–14Performance tests 3–2, 3–38–3–107
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System M
cartridge handling 3–102–3–107electrometer 3–91–3–101immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81–3–90incubator 3–49–3–52PSID scanner 3–53–3–58reference metering 3–72–3–80reflectometer 3–59–3–71sample metering 3–39–3–48
Periodic maintenance 2–1–2–74screen display 2–2as-required procedures 2–38–2–73daily procedures 2–3–2–26decontaminating the analyzer 2–74preparing for 2–1–2–2safety precautions 2–1waste materials 2–1weekly procedures 2–27–2–37what to wear while performing 2–1who should perform xx
Plunger count test, cartridge handling 3–102PM eject, MEDS movement sequence 3–16PM slide-eject position
clearing jams 5–41–5–44Power
does not go on 5–50Precautions. See Safeguards and precautionsPrinter, Okidata
reinstalling ribbon cartridge 6–14replacing printhead 6–11–6–14
Printing problems 5–51–5–54Proboscis movement sequence 3–11Proboscis, cleaning 2–67–2–72PSID scanner
cleaning window 2–72–2–73performance tests 3–53–3–58
tool slide test 3–53–3–56user samples test 3–57–3–58
PSID Alignment Tool, TL-4531 3–53, 3–54Pump movement sequence 3–13
QQuality control (QC) fluids
backing up data 2–35running daily 2–11situations requiring 2–33, 2–48, 3–31
RRate/CM correction factor test 3–19–3–28
after performing test 3–28assay values 3–20, 3–21, 3–23before performing test 3–19
aintenance and Diagnostics Guide Index–v
Index
correction factorsdisplaying and printing 3–25how to update 3–28summary screen 3–24when to update 3–27
disposing of/reusing slides 3–24positioning reference slides 3–23standard deviations 3–26summary screen 3–26time to complete test 3–24when to perform 3–19, 3–28
Rebooting the analyzer program 5–12Recent history log 3–108, 3–110–3–112Reference fluid
changing micro tip and reservoir 2–14–2–17daily maintenance 2–12–2–17
Reference Fluid Reservoirwhen to change 2–14
Reference meteringenabling and disabling 3–15performance tests 3–72–3–80
system 3–72, 3–74–3–80timing 3–72, 3–73
Reference Set 1–1Reference slides. See Slides, referenceReflectometer
MEDS 3–17performance tests 3–59–3–71
dynamic 3–59, 3–66–3–71shutter 3–59, 3–59–3–60static 3–59, 3–61–3–65
Reflectometer iris, adjusting 2–43–2–48filter (voltage) adjustment guidelines 2–46, 3–30filter (voltage) verification guidelines 2–47, 3–31noting voltage reading 2–45setting voltage 2–46see also Chapter 3, Diagnostics
Reflectometer lampchanging 2–42–2–43
instructions on label 2–42safety door 2–42, 2–43stabilizing new lamp 2–43, 3–30
Reflectometer Lamp-Extracting Tool, TL-3372 2–42Replacing parts 6–1–6–14
installing slide supply rotor sensor 6–1–6–6replacing printhead on Okidata printer 6–11–6–
14replacing slide supply dispense blade 6–7–6–10
Reports, forms printer flags and codes 5–11Reservoirs (Immuno-Wash Fluid and reference fluid)
cleaning covers and seals 2–16–2–17, 2–25–2–26
Index–vi VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System M
RESET target, MEDS 3–3RETURN target
on error log screen 5–6on troubleshooting help screen 5–10
Ribbon cartridge, reinstalling 6–14ROM versions, verifying 3–109Rotor movement test, cartridge handling 3–105–3–
107Rotor sensors, replacing 6–1–6–6Rubber stoppers
replacing 2–19–2–20
SSafeguards and precautions viii–xx
analyzer labels xii–xixelectrical hazards xigeneral xxlaser light warning x
Saline, bottles for 2–19Sample fluid drop sequence 3–13Sample handler
MEDS movement sequences 3–4–3–6diluent supply 3–6mixing-cup array 3–5tip supply 3–5tray transport 3–5
Sample meteringclearing jams 5–15MEDS movement sequences 3–9–3–13
pump/sample fluid drop 3–12–3–13truck/proboscis 3–10–3–11
path, cleaning 2–36performance tests 3–39–3–48
drop detection 3–39, 3–44–3–48leak/hysteresis 3–39, 3–40–3–43
tubingpt no 994659, in spare parts kit 2–50replacing 2–49–2–50
Sample tipsloading 2–9
Sample trays, cleaning and inspecting 2–7Sample/test identification
troubleshooting help screen 5–9Samples, downloaded
error messages 5–11Screen, touch
not functioning properly 5–49targets not responding 5–50
Screen-saver feature 5–49Search criteria, datalogger files 3–117–3–124
chemistry 3–119–3–120environmental data 3–122–3–123
aintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Index
error codes 3–124incubator position 3–121
Self-diagnostic features 5–1–5–11error conditions 5–1–5–6error messages for downloaded samples 5–11help screens 5–7–5–10
Serial numbersname plate on sample handler xiiiname plate on slide processor xiii
Setup/adjust 3–2, 3–18–3–32current setup values 3–32Rate/CM correction factor test 3–19–3–28reflectometer iris adjustment 3–29–3–31
Severity levels 5–1–5–3action 5–2attention 5–2malfunction 5–2on error log screen 5–5, 5–6shutdown 5–3transient 5–2
Shutter test, reflectometer 3–59, 3–59–3–60Shutting down the analyzer 5–12
see also Operator’s Manual, Chapter 4Signal processing test
immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81, 3–87reference metering 3–72, 3–77
Slide Box Liner 2–6Slide cartridges, clearing jams
load door 5–16–5–19slide supply access door 5–24–5–26unload door 5–20–5–23
Slide disposal box 2–5capacity 2–4liner 2–6
Slide inventory, verifying 2–10–2–11Slide supplies
humidity control 4–10–4–15MEDS 3–7–3–8movement sequences 3–8temperature control 4–6–4–9
Slide supply dispense bladereplacing 6–7–6–10
Slide-disposal boxliner 2–6
Slides, reference 3–27black reference 3–19, 3–23disposal of used 3–24external (correction factor) 3–19, 3–20, 3–21,
3–67, 3–68internal (permanent) reference 2–57, 2–62, 3–
61, 3–67Software
Version 2.0 VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System M
control, returning to 3–37identification 3–109, 3–125–3–126
Stand-alone diagnostics 3–2, 3–33–3–37loopback tests 3–34–3–37
Static test, reflectometer 3–59, 3–61–3–65Stoppers, rubber
replacing 2–19–2–20Subsystem tests 3–1, 3–18Subsystems, analyzer
front view 5–9labels indicating letter designation and location 5–
8, 5–9top view 5–8
Supplies and disposals, daily maintenance. See Dispos-als and supplies, daily maintenance
System testsimmuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81, 3–84–3–90
hysteresis test 3–81, 3–89–3–90installing tool reservoir and tip 3–85–3–87leak test 3–81, 3–88–3–89signal processing 3–81, 3–87transducer check 3–81, 3–88
reference metering 3–74–3–80hysteresis test 3–72, 3–79installing tool reservoir and tip 3–75–3–77, 3–80leak test 3–72, 3–78–3–79signal processing test 3–72, 3–77transducer check 3–72, 3–78
TTemperature control
incubator 4–2–4–5slide supplies 4–6–4–9
Tip Rack 2–9Tip rack transport belt (illus) 2–9Tip supply, testing movement 3–5Tip/Cup Array Liner 2–6Tip-locator assembly, weekly cleaning 2–29–2–33Tip-locator/metering area
clearing jams 5–45–5–48Tool reservoir and tip, installing
immuno-rate (IR) metering 3–85–3–87reference metering 3–75–3–77, 3–80
Touch screencleaning 2–34screen saver 5–49
Transducer checkimmuno-rate (IR) metering 3–81, 3–88reference metering 3–72, 3–78sample metering 3–39, 3–41
Transient severity level 5–2
aintenance and Diagnostics Guide Index–vii
Index
Transport arm, cleaning 2–28Transverse shuttle
clearing jams 5–36–5–40MEDS movement sequence 3–15, 3–16
Tray jams, clearing 5–12–5–14Tray platform and hook, cleaning 2–28Tray transport, movement sequence 3–5Trays, sample. See Sample traysTroubleshooting 5–1–5–60
general procedures 5–49–5–60hardware 5–11–5–48self-diagnostic features 5–1–5–11
Truck movement sequence 3–11Tube adapter, cleaning 2–8
UUniversal precautions, OSHA 2–1, 2–74UP/DOWN targets, error log screen 5–6
VVerifying
quality-control fluids run on slide lots 2–11slide inventory 2–10–2–11
VITROS (7% BSA)/Bovine Serum Albumin 2–19VITROS Black Reference Slides 3–19VITROS Micro Tip
when to change 2–14, 2–24VITROS Urine Electrolyte Diluent 2–19VITROS VersaTips 2–9VITROS White Reference Slides 3–19Voltage readings, power monitoring 4–15Voltages
A/D reference check 3–44moving iris control switch to adjust 2–46, 3–30reference and resolution 3–40target, when adjusting reflectometer iris 2–46, 3–
30target, when verifying reflectometer iris 2–47, 3–
31
WWarnings
adjustments to Rate/CM correction factors 3–19, 3–28
cleaning materials used for biohazard procedures xx
Immuno-Wash Fluid reservoir 2–25laser light x, 2–72when removing printhead on Okidata printer 6–12when replacing sample metering tube 2–49
Weekly maintenance 2–27–2–37
Index–viii VITROS 250/350 Chemistry System M
screen display 2–27backing up QC, Config, and Calibration data 2–35cleaning
cup retainer 2–34keypad cover 2–35sample metering path 2–36sample-metering path 2–36tip-locator assembly 2–29–2–33touch screen 2–34–tray platform and transport arm 2–28
inspecting air filter 2–37White correction factor slides. See White reference
slidesWhite correction factors 3–21, 3–49White reference slides
external (correction factor) 3–19, 3–20, 3–21, 3–67, 3–68positioning in incubator 3–23, 3–68–3–70
internal (permanent) reference 2–57, 2–62
aintenance and Diagnostics Guide Version 2.0
Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.100 Indigo Creek DriveRochester, New York 14626-5101
Ortho-Clinical DiagnosticsJohnson & Johnson50 - 100 Holmers Farm WayHigh WycombeBuckinghamshire HP12 4DPUnited Kingdom
EC REP
Part No. J23232
Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide
Supplementfor 250AT Systems
Export authorized under general license GTDA (General Technical Data Available)
IMPORTANT
The information contained herein is based on the experience and knowledge relating to the subject matter gained by Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. prior to publication.
No patent license is granted by the information.
Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc. reserves the right to change this information without notice, and makes no warranty, express or implied, with respect to the information. The company shall not be liable for any loss or damage including consequential or special damages, resulting from the use of this information, even if loss or damage is caused by its negligence or other fault.
Vitros is a trademark of Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.
© Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc., 2001. All rights reserved. Printed in USA. 10/01.
Rev. 10/01 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems i
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems
Revision History
Revision Date Description
10/01 Reflects revised information:
• Daily Maintenance Log
2/00 First release of manual. Reflects version 7.0 of the software.
ii Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems Rev. 10/01
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Vitros 250 System Maintenance & Diagnostics GuideSupplement for 250AT Systems
List of Effective Pages
Each page in your manual should be at the publication date listed below.
Publication Date
Section Page
10/01 Chapter 2 - Periodic Maintenance
Daily Maintenance Log
2/00 All sections All pages
2/00 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems iii
Important Safeguards andPrecautions
Safeguards and Precautions for Vitros 250AT Chemistry Systems Follow the “Important Safeguards and Precautions” documented in the Vitros
250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide when operating the 250AT System. In addition, follow safety precautions and procedures provided by your automation vendor when working with the automation track.
Analyzer Labels The Vitros 250AT Chemistry System uses the same agency-approved, warning, safety, and miscellaneous labels as found on the 250 System. Refer to the “Important Safeguards and Precautions” in the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for illustrations of these labels.
There are two additional labels found on the 250AT System:
• Ports
• Mechanical Pinch-Point (Sample Metering)
Illustrations showing their locations follow.
iv Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
Important Safeguards and Precautions
Ports
Mechanical Pinch Point(Sample Metering)
2/00 Vitros 250AT Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 1–1
1 Welcome
About this Supplement This Supplement contains specific information for users of Automation Systems. It is designed for use in conjunction with the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide.
The Supplement consists of two sections. The Operator’s Manual Supplement for 250AT Systems contains supplemental information for your Vitros 250 Chemistry System Operator’s Manual. The Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems contains AT-specific information that supplements the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide.
The Vitros 250AT Chemistry System will provide optimum performance when you use it according to recommended operating and periodic maintenance instructions. (See the Operator’s Manual for the operating instructions, and Chapter 2, “Periodic Maintenance” in the Maintenance & Diagnostics volume and in this Supplement.) Be sure to perform all daily, weekly, and as-required maintenance procedures to keep your equipment running efficiently and to ensure reliable results. Sample maintenance logs are provided at the end of Chapter 2 for your convenience. Complete a maintenance log each time you perform maintenance procedures.
Should you encounter any difficulties in daily operation of the equipment, consult Chapter 3, “Diagnostics,” or Chapter 5, “Troubleshooting,” in the Maintenance & Diagnostics volume and in this Supplement. Should you encounter further difficulties, contact your Customer Support Representative for assistance.
Welcome
1–2 Vitros 250AT Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
2/00 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2–1
2 Periodic Maintenance
Preparing for Periodic Maintenance This chapter provides you with information for maintaining the
Vitros 250AT Chemistry System. This information is designed to supplement the procedures found in the “Periodic Maintenance” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide. You should become familiar with both of these chapters before performing maintenance procedures.
NOTE: You may leave the analyzer on, unless specified otherwise; but do not process samples while you perform maintenance procedures.
After performing each maintenance procedure, make a record of it on a maintenance log. There are sample logs designed for use with the 250AT System at the end of this chapter. You may copy them for your use, or you may want to establish a customized maintenance log for your own laboratory.
If questions arise on maintenance and diagnostics during daily operation of the analyzer, read the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide carefully. Refer to this Supplement for procedures that are specific to the 250AT System. If you still need assistance, contact your Customer Support Representative.
WARNING: Assume that all used equipment is contaminated with potentially infectious biological material. Use the “Univer-sal Precautions” recommended by OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) Bloodborne Pathogen Standard 29CFR1910.1030 when handling or cleaning equipment. In particular:
•Wear gloves, closed shoes, buttoned lab coats, and safety glasses throughout the cleaning and maintenance process.
•Treat all waste materials used in the cleaning process as contaminated. Follow the site procedures for your laboratory to dispose of these materials.
•Handle all equipment with care. Mechanical parts may have edges, pinch points, and corners that could potentially cause injury.
Refer to the “Important Safeguards and Precautions” at the beginning of the Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for more information. In addition, refer to the NCCLS guidelines for
Periodic MaintenancePreparing for Periodic Maintenance
2–2 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
“Protection of Laboratory Workers from Instrument Biohazards” (NCCLS Document M29-A).
To access the Periodic Maintenance screen and begin using the periodic maintenance features, touch PERIODIC MAINTENANCE on the Main Menu.
Instructions on using the daily, weekly, and periodic maintenance features are found in the “Periodic Maintenance” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide. The procedures documented in that volume also apply to 250AT Systems.
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
PM00A
HELPRETURN
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
> Touch a target to select a category.
DAILY MAINTENANCE
WEEKLY MAINTENANCE
AS REQUIRED MAINTENANCE
Categories:
REMOTE ENABLED
Daily Maintenance Log
Vitros 250AT Chemistry System
Part N
umber J11698
Review
ed by __________________________________________D
ate _____________________R
ev. 10/01
Mo
nth
/YearA
nalyzer J N
um
ber
An
alyzer Serial N
um
ber
Daily* - C
heck (✓
) Boxes
*Main
tenan
ce every 24 ho
urs u
nless
oth
erwise sp
ecified.
Day
12
34
56
78
910
1112
1314
1516
1718
1920
2122
2324
2526
2728
2930
31
Verify slide inventory/load cartridges
Em
pty mixing cup array / tip disposal box
Em
pty slide disposal box
Em
pty cartridge disposal box
Inspect sample trays; tube, cup, and
height adaptors
Load mixing cup arrays
Load sample tips
Change R
eference Fluid m
icro tip and clean R
eference Fluid
proboscis (every 8 hours)
Install new R
eference Fluid
disposable reservoir (white label)
Clean R
eference Fluid cover/seal
Change Im
muno-W
ash Fluid m
icro tip and clean Im
muno-W
ash Fluid
proboscis (every 8 hours)
Install new Im
muno-W
ash Fluid
disposable reservoir (yellow label)
(every 72 hours)
Clean Im
muno-W
ash Fluid cover/seal
Inspect diluent tray and bottles
Check diluent levels and replace if required
Clean diluent caps
Load diluent tray on analyzer
Verify correct date/tim
e on screen
Verify that daily Q
C has been run
Operator’s Initials
Weekly and As-Required M
aintenance LogVitros 250AT Chem
istry System
Review
ed by __________________________________________D
ate _____________________
Mo
nth
/YearA
nalyzer J N
um
ber
An
alyzer Serial N
um
ber
Weekly—
Date/In
itial Boxes
Week 1
Week 2
Week 3
Week 4
Week 5
As R
equ
iredD
ateIn
itial
Clean tray platform
and transport armR
eplace humidity control packs in S
lide Supply 1
Clean cup retainer
Replace desiccant packs in S
lide Supply 2
Clean diluent bottles
Replace tubing on sam
ple metering proboscis
Clean tip locator assem
blyR
eplace or clean incubator evaporation caps
Clean control unit screen
Replace reference fluid seal
Clean keypad cover
Replace Im
muno-W
ash Fluid seal
Inspect, clean, and/or replace air filterR
eplace diluent caps
Back up Q
C/C
onfig/Calibration D
ataC
lean slide discard chutes
Clean AT
L bowl (see V
itros ATL G
uide)C
lean analyzer cabinetry
Clean incubator evaporation caps and slots
Clean sam
ple metering proboscis
Clean dispense blade/slide path
Replace reflectom
eter lamp
Adjust reflectom
eter iris
Perform
Rate/C
M C
orrection Factors test
Archive patient results
Every 6 M
on
ths - D
ate/Initial B
oxesD
ateIn
itial
Replace AT
L air filter (see Vitros AT
L Guide)
Clean AT
L linear rail (see ATL G
uide)
Operator’s Initials
Ortho-C
linical Diagnostics, Inc.
100 Indigo Creek D
riveR
ochester, New
York 14626-5101
Vitros is a tradem
ark of O
rtho-Clinical D
iagnostics, Inc.
O
rtho- Clinical D
iagnostics, Inc., 2001.P
rinted in U.S
.A.
Part N
umber J11698R
ev. 10/01.
2/00 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 3–1
3 Diagnostics
Using the Diagnostics Function Using the Diagnostics menu, you can access several of the
diagnostics features provided with the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System. These features may be helpful should you encounter any difficulties in daily operation of the equipment.
This chapter describes Diagnostics functions that specifically apply to the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System. Refer to the “Diagnostics” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for a description of Diagnostics procedures used for both 250 Chemistry Systems and 250AT Chemistry Systems.
To access the diagnostics screen, touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
The features available on this screen are:
• MEDS. Lets you exercise the mechanical parts of the analyzer. You can also use MEDS for multiple moves within or across subsystems.
• SUBSYSTEM TESTS. Lets the Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics Field Engineer run electromechanical diagnostics.
• LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER. Displays all characters transmitted to and from the laboratory computer. This feature is useful in troubleshooting the laboratory computer interface.
DIAGNOSTICS
May 19 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
MD00A
HELPRETURN
SUBSYSTEM TESTS
MEDS
STANDALONE DIAGNOSTIC
TESTS
SETUP/ ADJUST
HARDWARE AND CHEM
INFO
PERFORM-ANCE
TESTS
COMPLEX TESTS
LAB COMP PROTOCOL ANALYZER
REMOTE ENABLED
DiagnosticsMechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS)
3–2 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
• SETUP/ADJUST. Lets you perform the Rate/CM correction factor test (white/black correction factors), adjust the reflectometer iris, and display current setup values.
This feature also lets the Field Engineer set up and adjust sample metering, read sync, and slide transport.
• STANDALONE DIAGNOSTICS TESTS. Lets you perform the loopback test that verifies the operation of any of the three output device ports for either printer or for the lab computer interface.
All other stand-alone diagnostics are for Field Engineer use only. They allow the Field Engineer to determine the status of various subsystems outside the control software.
• COMPLEX TESTS. Lets the Field Engineer perform electromechanical simulations.
• PERFORMANCE TESTS. Lets you perform tests and generate statistics on selected analyzer subsystems.
• HARDWARE AND CHEM INFO. Provides error history, datalogger analysis, and software identification.
Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS) Using Mechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS), you can perform
basic movements of the analyzer one at a time. This can help you diagnose any problems that may exist in the analyzer.
To access the MEDS screen:
1. Touch DIAGNOSTICS on the Main Menu.
2. Touch MEDS on the main Diagnostics screen.
2/00 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 3–3
DiagnosticsMechanism Exercise Diagnostics (MEDS)
3. Touch the target for the mechanism you want to exercise. Additional targets will appear for each selection. The EXTERNAL TIP SUPPLY target appears only if automation is enabled.
4. Touch RETURN to exit MEDS.
The following pages show the MEDS submenus that are specific to 250AT Systems and suggested movement sequences. Submenus used to exercise 250AT System mechanisms include:
• MEDS Sample Metering
— Truck/Proboscis
— Pump/Sample Fluid Drop
• MEDS External Tip Supply
Refer to the “Diagnostics” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for a complete description of all other submenus.
MEDS – Main Menu
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READYLAB COMP :TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME00A
HELPRETURN
SLIDESUPPLY 1
SAMPLEHANDLER
RM/IRMETERING
SAMPLEMETERING
REFLECTO-METER
SLIDE SUPPLY 2 INCUBATOR
EXTERNAL TIPSUPPLY
REMOTE ENABLED
DiagnosticsMEDS Sample Metering
3–4 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
IMPORTANT:Each screen that appears has a RESET target at the bottom. Touch the RESET target before returning to the MEDS Main Menu after you have finished exer-cising a mechanism. For example, after exercising sample metering, touch the RESET SAMPLE METERING target before you return to the MEDS Main Menu.
MEDS Sample Metering Touch SAMPLE METERING on the MEDS Main Menu to display the Sample Metering menu.
• Touch TRUCK/PROBOSCIS to display the Truck/Proboscis screen.
• Touch PUMP/SAMPLE FLUID DROP to display the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen.
• Touch RETURN to return to the Main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering
Feb 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME04A
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETE
LAB COMP :
RETURN TO MAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
TRUCK / PROBOSCIS
PUMP / SAMPLE
FLUID DROP
REMOTE ENABLED
2/00 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 3–5
DiagnosticsMEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences— Truck/Proboscis
MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Truck/Proboscis
• Touch RESET SAMPLE METERING before and after exercising any of the sample metering mechanisms.
• To exercise the sample metering mechanisms, follow the sequences listed below. The truck, proboscis, and pump must be moved in a specific sequence, or you will receive an error message and the movement will not occur. Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost.
• Touch RETURN to return to the main Sample Metering screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Truck Movement Sequence• If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch TRUCK/
PROBOSCIS to get to the Truck/Proboscis screen.
• The INTERNAL/EXTERNAL target acts as a toggle switch. It displays the metering mechanism currently available for selection. If INTERNAL is displayed, it means that the external metering mechanism (used when sampling from the automation track) is already selected and will be used in the truck movement sequence. If you touch the target, it will toggle to the internal metering mechanism and EXTERNAL will display. Touch the target if you want to test the metering mechanism shown; that is, if the target displays INTERNAL you can touch it to toggle to internal. If the target displays
MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering – Truck/Proboscis
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME04B
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETELAB COMP :
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
SAMPLE MIX CUPRIGHT
CM / RTMETERING HOME METERING
PAUSETIP
SEAL
SAHAREFERENCEPOSITION
DILUENTTRAY /
TIP EJECT
CYCLETRUCK DILUENT METERING CYCLE
PROBOSCIS
TIPPICK-UP
TIPSEAL
RESET TRUCK
SAMPLECUP
BOTTOM
TIPPICK-UP
RESETPROBOSCIS
MIX CUPLEFT
PMMETERING
MIXINGCUP
BOTTOM
TIPEJECT
| - - - - - - - - - - -- - - Truck - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - | | - - - - - - - - - - - Proboscis - - - - - - -- - - - - - -|
RESETSAMPLE
METERINGINTERNAL
REMOTE ENABLED
DiagnosticsMEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences— Truck/Proboscis
3–6 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
EXTERNAL, you can touch it to toggle to the external mechanism.
Touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE METERING
2. SAHA REFERENCE
3. DILUENT TRAY/TIP EJECT
4. TIP PICKUP
5. SAMPLE
6. MIX CUP LEFT
7. MIX CUP RIGHT
8. PM METERING
9. CM/RT METERING
10. TIP SEAL
11. RESET TRUCK
12. CYCLE TRUCK
13. RESET SAMPLE METERING
Proboscis Movement Sequence• If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch TRUCK/
PROBOSCIS to get to the Truck/Proboscis screen.
Pull the tip tray out of the sample metering path, then touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE METERING
2. HOME
3. DILUENT TRAY/TIP EJECT
4. DILUENT
5. RESET SAMPLE METERING
6. SAMPLE
7. SAMPLE CUP BOTTOM
8. RESET SAMPLE METERING
9. PM METERING
10. METERING PAUSE
11. METERING
12. RESET SAMPLE METERING
2/00 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 3–7
DiagnosticsMEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/Sample Fluid Drop
MEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/Sample Fluid Drop
• Touch RESET SAMPLE METERING before and after exercising any of the sample metering mechanisms.
• To exercise the sample metering mechanisms, follow the sequences listed below. The truck, proboscis, and pump must be moved in a specific sequence, or you will receive an error message and the movement will not occur. Touch the RESET target under each mechanism if the mechanism is lost.
• Touch RETURN to return to the main Sample Metering screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
Pump Movement Sequence• If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch PUMP/
SAMPLE FLUID DROP to get to the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen.
Touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE METERING
2. ASPIRATE
3. METER
4. CYCLE PUMP HALF STEP
5. CYCLE PUMP FULL STEP
6. RESET SAMPLE METERING
MEDS – Main Menu – Sample Metering – Pump / Sample Fluid Drop
Feb 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME04C
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETELAB COMP :
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
ASPIRATE RESETPUMP
WETNESSSENSINGON | OFF
PICKUPTIP
CYCLESAMPLE
METERING
METERPRESSURESENSINGON | OFF
ASPIRATEDROP
CYCLEPUMP
HALF STEP
WETNESSEMITTERON | OFF
METERSAMPLE
DROP
CYCLEPUMP
FULL STEP
EJECTTIP
| - - - - - - - - - - - - - Pump - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - |
RESETSAMPLE
METERING
| - - - Sample Fluid Drop - - -|
INTERNAL
DiagnosticsMEDS Sample Metering Movement Sequences—Pump/Sample Fluid Drop
3–8 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
Sample Fluid Drop Sequence• If you are at the MEDS Sample Metering screen, touch PUMP/
SAMPLE FLUID DROP to get to the Pump/Sample Fluid Drop screen.
IMPORTANT:
1. Make sure the tip tray is in the metering path with tips in the tray.
2. Make sure a sample container is in place with fluid in it (use the target MOVE TRAY N TO METERING on the Sample Handler screen).
3. Make sure that a slide is in place before you meter (use steps 1-8 of the exercise procedure under Slide Supplies 1 & 2 to move a slide to the metering position).
• The INTERNAL/EXTERNAL target acts as a toggle switch. It displays the metering mechanism currently available for selection. If INTERNAL is displayed, it means that the external metering mechanism is already selected and will be used in the sample fluid drop sequence. If you touch the target, it will toggle to the internal metering mechanism and EXTERNAL will display. Touch the target if you want to test the metering mechanism shown; that is, if the target displays INTERNAL you can touch it to toggle to internal. If the target displays EXTERNAL, touch it to toggle to the external mechanism.
Touch the targets in the following order.
1. RESET SAMPLE METERING
2. PICKUP TIP
3. ASPIRATE DROP
4. METER SAMPLE DROP
5. EJECT TIP
6. CYCLE SAMPLE METERING
7. RESET SAMPLE METERING
2/00 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 3–9
DiagnosticsMEDS External Tip Supply
MEDS External Tip Supply This sequence tests the Automatic Tip Loader and its delivery of tips to the tip shuttle.
• Touch RESET TIP LOADER before selecting the first External Tip Supply target.
• Touch any other target to exercise the selected mechanism.
• Touch RETURN to return to the main MEDS screen, or touch RETURN TO MAIN DIAG MENU to return to the main Diagnostics screen.
MEDS – External Tip Supply
Feb 22 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250
> Touch a target to select a function.
ME08A
HELPRETURN
READY TESTING COMPLETELAB COMP :
RETURN TOMAIN DIAG
MENU
SAMPLING
OFFON
PRESENTTIP
RESET SHUTTLE
HOMESHUTTLE
CYCLESHUTTLE
DELIVERTIP
RESETTIP
LOADER
REMOTE ENABLED
DiagnosticsMEDS External Tip Supply
3–10 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
2/00 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 4–1
4 Environmental Monitoring
Environmental Monitoring You can use this diagnostic feature to review the status of the environmentally controlled stations and the power supplies. After you touch the ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING target on the Main Menu, the following screen is displayed.
Environmental Monitoring functions for the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System are identical to those for the 250 System. Refer to the “Environmental Monitoring” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for a complete description of these functions.
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING
Apr 24 XX
14:13:12
VX.XX**250READY
LAB COMP :
TESTING COMPLETE
SAMPLING
OFFON
> Station and voltage readings are updated on a ten-second interval.
NOTE: Flashing * indicates station or voltage readings not within spec.
ME15A
HELPRETURN
Temperature 1 Temperature 2 Relative Humidity
Incubator 35.86* 36.37*
Slide Supply 1 25.51* 33.40
Slide Supply 2 22.19 29.00*
Reflectometer 69.00
Ambient 22.85
POWER SUPPLY 5V 12V –12V 15V –15V 24VM 24VF
Slide Supply/Cart.Load 5.15 11.77 –12.20 14.30 –16.62* 23.86 23.50
Incubator/Immuno-Rate 5.15 11.68 –12.10 13.20* –14.91 24.05 23.86
Ref. Mtrng/Slide Transport 5.15 11.77 –12.05 13.20* –14.86 23.86 23.50
Sample Handler 0.00* 0.00* 0.00*
Sample Metering 5.00 23.86 23.86
Electrometer 4.96 14.97 23.83
Reflectometer 5.03
REMOTE ENABLED
Environmental MonitoringEnvironmental Monitoring
4–2 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
2/00 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 5–1
5 Troubleshooting
This chapter provides information that you need to know when resolving conditions concerning the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” chapter of the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide for complete troubleshooting instructions.
Contact your lab automation vendor for help in resolving conditions involving the automation system.
Loading/Resetting (Rebooting) the Analyzer Program To load or reset the 250AT System analyzer program:
1. Shut down the analyzer by touching the SHUTDOWN ANA-LYZER target on the Main Menu.
— If the touchscreen is not working, continue with Step 4 of this procedure.
2. Type “Y” and press the Enter key on the keyboard when prompted.
3. Wait until you see the message, “The analyzer has been shut down. Reset or power down is required.”
4. Turn off the analyzer’s main power switch (O or OFF). Leave the analyzer turned off for at least two minutes before turning the analyzer back on.
5. If you are using an optional Automatic Tip Loader (ATL), turn off the ATL.
6. Turn the ATL back on, if applicable. Wait until the message “WAITING FOR ANALYZER” is displayed.
7. Turn on the analyzer’s main power switch (I or ON). Wait for the Main Menu to appear (approximately ten minutes).
8. Verify that the correct date and time are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. To correct the date and time, see the “Special Services” section of Chapter 10, “Options,” in the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System Operator’s Manual, or see the Operator’s Quick Guide.
NOTE: Make sure the date and time are correct to prevent discrepancies in storage and retrieval of calibration, quality-control, and patient data.
9. The analyzer is now ready for normal operation.
TroubleshootingClearing Analyzer Tip Jams on the Vitros 250AT System
5–2 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
Clearing Analyzer Tip Jams on the Vitros 250AT System Follow these steps to clear a jam in the Vitros 250AT System tip
shuttle:
1. Raise the top left cover of the 250AT Chemistry System.
The service interlock system will remove power from the analyzer motors.
2. Using the wooden end of a cotton swab, gently push the jammed tip(s) upward until the tip shuttle is freed.
3. Rotate the tip shuttle toward the front of the analyzer.
4. Pull the jammed tips downward to remove them, and discard them.
5. Close the analyzer cover.
6. Touch the REINITIALIZE target to continue operation.
TipShuttleArea
Swab
2/00 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 6–1
6 Replacing Parts
Follow the procedures outlines in the “Replacing Parts” chapter of the Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance & Diagnostics Guide if you need to replace any of the following parts:
• Slide supply rotor sensor
• Slide supply dispense blade
• Okidata printer printhead
Contact your Customer Support Representative if you require replacement of any other parts of the Vitros 250AT Chemistry System.
Contact your lab automation vendor for help in replacing any parts of the automation track or automation system.
Replacing Parts
6–2 Vitros 250 Chemistry System Maintenance and Diagnostics Guide Supplement for 250AT Systems 2/00
Ortho-Clinical Diagnostics, Inc.100 Indigo Creek DriveRochester, New York 14626-5101
Ortho-Clinical DiagnosticsJohnson & Johnson50 - 100 Holmers Farm WayHigh WycombeBuckinghamshire HP12 4DPUnited Kingdom
EC REP